EDS DESIGNSHOP MANUAL

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "EDS DESIGNSHOP MANUAL"

Transcription

1 EDS DESIGNSHOP MANUAL Melco Part Number Revision A

2 Copyright 2004 by Melco Embroidery Systems ALL RIGHTS RESERVED No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise) without prior written approval of Melco Embroidery Systems. Melco reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes in it at any time without obligation of Melco to notify any person or organization of such revisions or changes. All precautions have been taken to avoid errors or misrepresentations of facts, equipment, or products. However, Melco does not assume any liability to any party for loss or damage caused by errors or omissions. All trademarks and trade names used in this publication are the property of their respective owners. Printed in the United States of America Revision A, January 2004

3 LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR MELCO SOFTWARE IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY: This License Agreement is entered into between Melco Embroidery Systems ("Melco") and the undersigned user ("User"). 1. GRANT OF LICENSE. This License Agreement covers the Melco software product, contained on CD-ROM, on disk(s), or downloaded over the Internet, or a combination of the three, and accompanying documentation and/or manuals (the "Software"), and the dongle security device (the "Dongle") or the access code (the "Access Code"), all of which are referred to as the "Product." Melco grants to User a non-exclusive, non-transferable, personal, limited license to use the Product according to the terms of this License Agreement. User may also install the Software on a storage device, such as a network server, used only to install or run the Software on User's other computers over an internal network; however, User must acquire and dedicate a license for each separate computer on which the Software run from the storage device. A license for the Product may not be shared or used concurrently on different computers. The Product is licensed for use only by User and may not be re-licensed or sub-licensed without Melco's prior written permission. In the event that Melco grants such permission, a re-licensing fee will be charged. 2. COPYRIGHT. The Product contains proprietary information of Melco. This material is protected by copyright laws, international treaty provisions, and other laws respecting proprietary rights. Melco retains all rights in the Product, including (without limitation) all copyright and other proprietary rights worldwide in all media. User may not use the Product except as expressly permitted under this License Agreement and under U.S. copyright laws. 3. RESTRICTIONS. User may not and may not permit others to: copy, reproduce, publish, publicly display, distribute, sell, or otherwise use any material contained in the Product in any manner whatsoever that may infringe any copyright or proprietary interest of Melco (except that the User may make one backup copy of the Software); distribute, rent, sublicense, lease, transfer, assign or in any way commercially exploit, the Product or the License Agreement; decompile, disassemble or otherwise reverse-engineer the Product, or alter, translate, modify or adapt the Product to create derivative works. This license can only be transferred with written permission of Melco. This license is not a sale. Title and copyrights to the Product remain with Melco. If User breaches any provision of this License Agreement, Melco may immediately terminate this License Agreement and all licenses granted hereunder without prior notice and in addition to any other available rights and remedies. In such event, User shall immediately return to Melco all copies of the Software, accompanying documentation and/or manuals, and all associated Dongles that are within User's custody or control. 4. LIMITED WARRANTY. Melco warrants that the Software will perform substantially in accordance with published specifications and the accompanying written materials provided that the Software is used on the computer hardware and with the operating system for which it was designed, for a period of ninety (90) days. Melco does not warrant that the Software will meet the User's requirements or run without interruption or error. Melco warrants, in accordance with and subject to the provisions herein contained, the Dongle against defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service when properly installed for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of delivery to User. This warranty does not extend to or cover the Dongle or any part of it which, in the reasonable opinion of Melco, has been damaged or rendered defective by accident, electrostatic discharge, willful act, negligence, misuse, alteration, repair, electrical fusion, or lightning. Melco warrants a backup of the Access Codes for a period of ninety (90) days after the date of delivery to the User. Subject to the limitations stated above, Melco will use its best efforts to replace defective media, defective Dongles, or correct significant software error, provided that User returns the defective material to Melco Embroidery Systems, 1575 W. 124th Ave., Denver, CO 80234, within ninety (90) days of delivery, in the case of Software, and within twelve (12) months of delivery, in the case of a Dongle. This is User's sole remedy for breach of warranty. 5. NO OTHER WARRANTIES. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, MELCO DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REGARD TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY OR FREEDOM FROM ERROR OF THE OPERATION, USE AND FUNCTION OF THE PRODUCT. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAY HAVE OTHERS, WHICH VARY FROM STATE/JURISDICTION TO STATE/JURISDICTION. 6. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL MELCO BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT, EVEN IF MELCO HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 7. CUSTOMER'S RESPONSIBILITY. It is the User's responsibility to verify before purchase that the Product will be suitable for User's intended purpose(s). It is also the responsibility of the User to disclose to a potential buyer of the Product, that transfer of the Product requires the prior written permission of Melco and that a re-licensing fee is charged by Melco for transfer of the license to another party.

4

5 Table of Contents 1. Introduction 1 About this Manual Conventions Used in this Manual System Requirements DesignShop and AMAYA OS Incompatible Hardware / Software Product Levels Installation Installing Dongles Installing USB Dongles (Windows XP and Windows 2000) Installing Parallel Port Dongles Installing DesignShop DesignShop HTML Help System Using DesignShop 9 DesignShop Orientation DesignShop Menus Toolbars Status Bar View Window Project View Working with Files New File Open File Insert Save Save As Import and Export Importing a Design Formatting Exporting a Design

6 Send Print DesignShop Files and AMAYA OS Basic Functions Copy Cut Paste Delete Duplicate Undo Redo Find Global Scale Factor Basic Tools Ruler Show Grid Show Origin Grid and Origin Properties Show Stitches in 3D Hide/Show Stitches Zoom Customizing your Work Environment Inserting Design Notes Customizing Projects Naming Designs Changing Background Color Graphic Background Redraw/Redraw Speed Preferences Tab File Options Editing Properties Tab Point Size Constrained Line Input

7 3. Editing 47 Editing Levels Editing at the Project Level Editing at the Design Level Editing at the Element Level Editing at the Point Level Editing Properties View Tab Lock Stitch/Trim Tab Lock Stitches and Trims for Lettering Update Auto Lock/Trim Position Tab Scale Tab Status Tab AMAYA Machine Settings Tab Element Properties Walk Stitch Properties Column Properties Fill Properties Pattern Fills Satin Stitch Fills Decorative Stitch Fills Color Properties Editing Points Adding and Editing Wireframe Points Editing Stitch Points Convert Expanded To Wireframe Editing Tools Edit Mode Selection Tools Project Level Design Level Element Level Performing Basic Functions Moving Scaling

8 Rotating in the View Window Mirroring Grouping Ungrouping Aligning Snap to Grid Alignment Tools Spacing Auto-Sequencing Locking Change Element Type Split Element Center Design Color Change Trim Lettering 117 Inserting Lettering Individual Letter Selection Lettering Properties Lettering Tab Lettering Tools Group Names Creating Group Names Editing Group Name Lists Output Options Sewing Group Names Using Group Names with Step and Repeat Converting Lettering To Wireframe Digitizing 145 Introduction to Digitizing Quick Change Tools Working with Graphics Loading Scanning

9 Select Scanner Scan Graphic Modification Digitizing Manual and Walk Stitches Manual Stitch Walk Normal Stitch Walk Bean Stitch Walk Jump Stitch Decorative Stitch To use the standard decorative stitches Creating Decorative Stitches Test Settings Editing Decorative Stitches Digitizing Column Stitches Column Column Singleline Complex Column Column Effects Corners Random Edge Custom Density Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches Complex fill Complex fill hole Standard Fills To use the pre-defined standard fills Creating Standard Fills Pattern Fill To use the standard pattern fills Creating Pattern Fills Default Settings Test Settings Editing Pattern Fills Fill Effects Random Edge Wave Fills

10 Double Wave Fills Vantage Fill Radial Out Radial In Custom Density Additional Digitizing Tools Color Change Trim Return to Origin Set Insert Here Custom Files Auto Shapes DesignShop Tools 205 Embroidery Network System Sending a design to the peripheral Design Database Icon Generator Accelerator Editor Business Assistant Convert / Restore Alphabets Design Filter Stitch Filter Proximity Filter Factory Defaults Hoop Manager Pre-Defined Hoops User-Defined Hoops Additional Settings Custom Hoop Shape Custom Sew Field Shape Multi-Ring Hoops (Spider Hoops) Pre-Defined Spider Hoop Configurations Creating Custom Spider Hoops Tablet Digitizer Tablet Setup

11 The Tablet Toolbar Security Step and Repeat Batch Converter Auto-Digitizing 243 Introduction Bitmap vs. Vector Images Preparing Images for Auto-Digitizing Working with Vector Graphics Working with Vector Objects Subtract Vector Objects Combine Vector Objects Adding Vector Objects Converting Embroidery Designs to Vector Graphics Working with Bitmap Images Converting Bitmap Images to Vector Objects Converting Pieces of a Graphic Stitch Graphic Region Custom Selection Tutorials - Using DesignShop 255 DesignShop Orientation Working with the Project View Working with the View Window Basic Functionality Opening a Design Saving a Design Importing a Design from a Floppy Disk Exporting a Design to a Floppy Disk Printing a Design Printing a Logo ing a Design Inserting a Design File into a Project Cut, Copy and Paste

12 Deleting Parts of a Design Customizing your Work Environment Using Auto Save Saving Notes to a Design Changing Redraw Speed Tutorials - Editing 263 Working with Editing Tools Selecting a Design Graphically (in View Window) Selecting a Design Through the Project View Scaling a Design Through the Project View Scaling a Design Graphically (in View Window) Scaling Part of a Design Through the Project View Scaling Part of a Design Graphically (in View Window) Rotating a design Centering Designs Inserting Color Changes and Trims Working with Properties Pages Checking the Design Status Adding Lock Stitches (Design Level) Adding Lock Stitches (Element Level) Changing Walk Stitch Length at Element Level Changing Column Density at Element Level Changing Column Width at Element Level Adding Underlay to a Column Adding Underlay to a Fill Saving Standard Fill Editing Wireframe Points Selecting Wireframe Input points Changing Wireframe Input Points Adding Wireframe Input Points Moving Wireframe Input Points Deleting Wireframe Input Points

13 10. Tutorials - Lettering 285 Adding Lettering to a Design Adding Color Changes to Lettering Customized Spacing Adding Specific Trims Placing Letters on an Arc Changing Lettering Column Width Changing Lettering Density Adding Underlay to Lettering Centering Lettering Transforming Lettering (with Base Line Types) Rotating Lettering Tutorials - Digitizing 295 Working with Graphics Scanning an Image Opening a Graphic Saving a Graphic Scaling a Graphic Hiding a Graphic Digitizing Color Changes/Trims Digitizing Walk Normal or Walk Bean Stitches Setting Stitch Length Turning on Retrace Digitizing a Basic Walk Normal/Bean Stitch Digitizing Column Stitches Setting Density For Columns Turning on Underlay Digitizing a Basic Column Using Column Digitizing a Basic Column Using Column Digitizing a Basic Singleline Changing Singleline Column Width Digitizing Complex Fills Digitizing a Basic Complex Fill

14 12. Tutorials - Tools 311 Group Sewing To Create Group Names Auto-Digitizing Tutorials - More Practice 317 Columns Digitize a column 1 using straight points Digitize a column 1 using curved and straight points Digitize a column 2 using curved and straight points Digitize singleline columns using straight points Digitize singleline columns using curved and straight points Complex Fills Complex Fill and Complex Hole Digitize a complex hole Creating Pattern Fills Walk stitches Digitize a walk stitch using curved and straight points Digitize a manual stitch Creating Decorative Stitches Creating Radial Out Fills Creating Vantage Fills Creating Wave Fills Creating Double-Wave Fills

15 1. INTRODUCTION IN THIS CHAPTER: About this Manual Conventions Used in this Manual Product Levels Installation DesignShop HTML Help System Rev. A Melco Embroidery Systems

16 2 About this Manual About this Manual This manual provides detailed information on the tools and features available in EDS DesignShop (also referred to as DesignShop). The first half of this manual is devoted to explaining how to use DesignShop. This is where you will find explanations of editing properties and tools, digitizing procedures, etc. The second half of this manual is devoted to DesignShop tutorials. These tutorials are designed to help you practice using DesignShop. Conventions Used in this Manual Buttons, menu items, windows, and tabs within DesignShop are emphasized with bold text (e.g., Click the OK button). Menu selection paths within DesignShop are emphasized with bold, italicized text (e.g., Select File->Save). A keyboard command is emphasized with Courier text (e.g., Press the CTRL key). Denotes helpful information that may make a procedure easier and more efficient. Denotes that a tutorial is available for the topic. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

17 System Requirements 3 System Requirements PC with a Pentium II 300 MHz or higher processor (Pentium III 450 MHz or higher recommended for versions higher than DesignShop Lite) If you plan on installing AMAYA OS and DesignShop on the same PC, a Pentium III 850 MHz or higher is recommended. Microsoft Windows 98, Windows Millennium, Windows XP Home, Windows XP Professional, or Windows 2000 operating system. If you plan on installing AMAYA OS and DesignShop on the same computer, either Windows 2000 or Windows XP is highly recommended. Note: Non-western languages (such as Polish, Czech, Japanese and Russian) require Windows 2000 or Windows XP. 128MB of RAM (128MB (+) recommended) for Windows 98/ME; 128MB (128MB (+) recommended) for Windows XP Home, Windows XP Professional and Windows Super VGA video adapter and monitor configured for 1024x768 resolution or higher, video driver set to High Color or better for Windows 98 / Millennium; color or higher for Windows XP Home, Windows XP Professional and Windows If you want to change the settings of your screen resolution, please click on the Start button of your Windows taskbar, followed by a click on Help. Do a search for display, resolution. USB or Parallel port for DesignShop security dongle CD-ROM drive (required for DesignShop installation, 16X is recommended) Two or three button mouse (3 button mouse preferred) Internet Explorer 5.0 or greater DesignShop and AMAYA OS You can install and run AMAYA OS and DesignShop on the same computer. However, for optimum performance of both of these programs, the guidelines listed on the next page should be followed Rev. A 1. Introduction

18 4 Product Levels 1. The minimum system requirements for both programs must be met. Also, either Windows 2000 or Windows XP and a Pentium III 850 MHz or higher processor are highly recommended. 2. It is recommended that you install AMAYA OS/DesignShop on a dedicated PC. That is, the PC on which AMAYA OS/DesignShop are installed should not be used to run any other software applications. 3. ENS should not be installed on any PC on which AMAYA OS is installed. 4. On the AMAYA OS/DesignShop PC, when running AMAYA OS, avoid performing hardware-intensive tasks such as scanning. Also, it is recommended that extensive digitizing be performed on a different PC. Incompatible Hardware / Software DesignShop users should avoid the HP Deskjet G55 printer Driver. Users have reported unspecified problems with DesignShop when this driver is installed. Product Levels The following DesignShop product levels are available. This list also provides a brief overview of what features are available in each level. The feature availability is described in more detail throughout the manual. DesignShop Lite (Lettering, Limited manipulation of designs, such as scaling) DesignShop (Lettering, Manipulation of designs, Editing, Digitizing) DesignShop Pro (Lettering, Editing, Digitizing, Auto-Digitizing) DesignShop Pro Plus (Lettering, Editing, Digitizing, Auto- Digitizing, Vector File Support) DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

19 Installation 5 Installation Complete the following instructions to install DesignShop and the DesignShop dongle. Installing Dongles DesignShop will work with either a parallel port or USB dongle. Procedures for installing both of these dongle types are provided below. Installing USB Dongles (Windows XP and Windows 2000) NOTE: Melco does not support or recommend the installation USB dongles on Windows 98 and Windows ME. To install the USB dongle and support software, follow these instructions in the order they are given. You need to follow these instructions whether or not you have already installed DesignShop on your PC. 1. Insert your DesignShop CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Click on Cancel when the Setup screen appears. 3. Plug in the USB dongle to an available USB port on the PC or an available USB port on a USB hub. After a few moments Windows will display the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box. 4. Follow the directions as given by the Windows Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box. Note that if you are prompted to navigate to the Rainbow USB device driver, it is located in the root directory of the DesignShop CD. When installing the driver, you may receive a message dialog stating that the driver is unsigned. If you receive this message, click the Continue button in this dialog to proceed. 5. When the driver installation is completed, reboot the computer before installing or running DesignShop. Installing Parallel Port Dongles The parallel port dongle is a security device that must be installed in an active parallel port of your computer Rev. A 1. Introduction

20 6 Installation 1. Turn the computer OFF. Parallel port dongles should never be added or removed when power is turned on. 2. Locate an active parallel port on the rear of your computer. Usually this is LPT1, but it could be LPT2 if you have two parallel ports. 3. Secure the dongle with the captive screws at its sides. If a dongle is already installed on the computer, attach the DesignShop dongle to the back of the existing dongle(s). The general rule of thumb for stacking dongles is to connect the newest to oldest, with the oldest connected to the computer. Installing DesignShop 1. Insert the DesignShop Program CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Follow the auto-run installation program instructions. 3. The DesignShop installation asks several questions during the installation. It may ask you to type in your Access Code; this can be found on the cover of your DesignShop CD jewel case. It will also ask if you want to copy the EDS III and EDS IV alphabets to DesignShop. If the auto-run installation program doesn t begin: 1. Select Start -> Run to display the Run dialog box. 2. Browse to your CD ROM drive. 3. Select setup.exe and click Open. 4. Click OK and follow the on-screen instructions to install DesignShop. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

21 DesignShop HTML Help System 7 DesignShop HTML Help System To access the DesignShop HTML Help System, simply go to the Help menu and select Help or click the toolbar button. You can also press the F1 key. When you are in a property page, press the F1 key to go directly to help on that dialog. Tips for using the HTML Help System: Use the red navigation bar buttons to easily access topics. There are three tabs on the left side to search for topics: Table of Contents, Index, or Search. You can click the Home button to display the initial screen at any time. When viewing Help, you can maximize the Help window or resize it to suit your preference. However, the Help System was designed to display optimally in the default window size. Click the Hide or Show navigation buttons to view or hide the TOC, Index, and Search tabs. Click the Back button to return to the previously viewed topic. Click Print to print topics. The Print dialog provides options for printing the current topic, everything contained in a current heading (based on the item selected at the Table of Contents), or everything in the Help system. You can also right-click inside the topic frame and select Print from the pop-up menu. The Options drop-down button provides additional browse and navigation controls. Click and hold the Options button to show the additional controls. Many topics include a Related Topics button at the end of the text that displays a pop-up menu of related topics that you can click on and go to. To identify a tool or control in DesignShop, position your mouse pointer over the tool or control and wait one second. A tool tip will appear showing the name Rev. A 1. Introduction

22 8 DesignShop HTML Help System User Guide and HTML Help Note For more information on any topic, go to the HTML Help System and type the topic in the index tab, click the Display button or hit ENTER on your keyboard. You can also go to the Reference Page in the HTML Help System and click on any item to learn more about it. Please keep in mind that the DesignShop User Guide and Design- Shop HTML Help system contain reference for all product levels. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

23 2. USING DESIGNSHOP IN THIS CHAPTER: DesignShop Orientation Working with Files Basic Functions Basic Tools Customizing your Work Environment Rev. A Melco Embroidery Systems

24 10 DesignShop Orientation DesignShop Orientation For tutorials related to Design- Shop orientation, see pg This section will introduce you to all of the different areas of the DesignShop user interface, and will help you become familiar with the layout of DesignShop before you begin learning about its tools and features. DesignShop Menus The Menu Bar at the top of the DesignShop screen consists of a window icon, which provides access to the standard minimize application, maximize application, and exit application functions. The menu bar also contains eight different menus: File, Edit, View, Insert, Tools, Custom, Window, and Help. These menus provide access to many of the tools and features that will be discussed throughout this manual. NOTE: If you have AMAYA OS (2004 or higher) installed on the DesignShop PC, a Machine menu will also be available. Toolbars The Main Toolbar consists of the following tool buttons: New File, Open File, Insert, Save, Notes, ENS, Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, Print, and About. The View Toolbar consists of the following tool buttons: Zoom tools, Ruler, Display Hoop, Origin, Grid, Snap To Grid, View in 3D, Hide/show Graphic, and Hide/show Stitches. The Object Toolbar consists of the following tool buttons: Select All, Group, Ungroup, Previous/next Element, Color Change, Trim, Return to Origin, Lettering to Wireframe, Change Element Type, Split Element, Auto lock/trim, Center Design, Mirroring Tools, and Auto-Digitizing and Vector tools, if available. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

25 DesignShop Orientation 11 The Input Toolbar consists of the following tool buttons: Edit Mode, Manual Stitch, Walk Jump Stitch, Walk (normal) Stitch, Bean Stitch, Decorative Stitch, Column 1, Column 2, Complex Column, Singleline Columns, Complex fill, Complex Hole, Lettering, Retrace, Stitch Type buttons (depending on which digitizing tool you have selected), and Auto Shapes. The Mini-Palette Toolbar consists of Background Color, Step Through Color, Colors, and Wrap Colors if used. You can also hide/ show colors by clicking on them in this toolbar. If you would like hide any of the toolbars, you can turn them off by selecting View->Toolbars, then left-clicking on the individual toolbars to hide/show them. You can also do this by right-clicking in the empty gray space to the right of the toolbars. You can also customize your toolbars to hide some of the tools or to change the order in which the tools are displayed. To do this, right click on the toolbar you want to change. When the Customize popup menu appears, left-click on it. You can move your toolbars around to any place on the screen. To do this, place your cursor in the far left corner of the toolbar, hold down the left mouse button, drag it to the desired location and let go. Status Bar The status bar displays helpful information about your project. The first box tells you the placement of your cursor. The second box tells you what level of zoom that you are at. The third box gives you very important steps for digitizing when you are inputting an element. Below the status bar boxes you will find helpful information on each tool when your cursor is above it Rev. A Using DesignShop

26 12 DesignShop Orientation View Window The View Window (the area in the middle of the DesignShop screen) is where you will view the project you are working on. The View Window can also be thought of as your work area or workspace. You will perform most of your editing and digitizing inside the View Window. When you have a design open, you can right-click in the View Window to access some of the tools available in DesignShop. All of these tools will be discussed in this manual. You can have multiple projects open at a time in DesignShop. When you have more than one project open, each of the projects will have its own View Window. When you have multiple projects open, you can use the Window menu to select the project you want to view (select Window->Design name). You can also use the Window menu to arrange multiple windows by tiling (select Window->Tile) or cascading (select Window->Cascade) them. You can also use the Window menu to close the project you are working in (select Window->Close) or to close all open projects (select Window->Close All). Project View The Project View area is the white box on the right side of the DesignShop screen. If this box is not visible on your DesignShop screen, select View->Project Views to make it visible (you can also do this to hide it). You can also show/hide the Project View area by right-clicking in the gray area to the right of the toolbars and leftclicking Project Views in the pop-up menu. The Project View area consists of four tabs: Project, Stitches, Navigator, and Palette. These tabs are designed to assist you while you are working on a project. To show/hide any of the tabs, rightclick one of the tabs and select the name of the tab you want to show/hide in the pop-up menu. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

27 DesignShop Orientation 13 The Project tab displays a tree view of everything that you have done within a project. This tree view consists of four levels, which are discussed below. The highest level in the tree view is the Project Level. The second level in a project is the Design Level. A project can consist of one or more designs. The next level in a project consists of the elements of each design. Each design can consist of one or more elements. The elements that make up a design can be Manual Stitch, Walk Stitch, Column1, Column 2, Complex Column, Singleline center, Singleline left, Singleline right, Complex Fill, Lettering, Color Change, Trim, and Return to Origin. All of these elements are discussed in more detail in this manual. The next level that follows the elements is the stitch list that displays the data-sets that are present. A data-set is any command that produces a stitch (data-sets consist of x-y coordinate data). If the design is wireframe (.OFM), the stitch list information will be in wireframe outline parameters. If the design is condensed (.CND), the stitch list information will be in wireframe outline parameters. No datasets are shown for expanded data. A plus sign (+) to the left of an object (e.g, an element) in the tree view indicates that the object contains a branch that can be expanded (by left-clicking on the plus sign or pressing the right arrow key on your keyboard). When a branch is expanded, you will see a minus sign (-) to the left of the object at the top of the branch. Click on the minus sign to collapse the branch (or press the left arrow key on your keyboard). You can also select an object, right-click on it, then select Tree Collapse Points from the pop-up menu. This will collapse all expanded branches at the lower levels of the tree view. Use the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard or the scroll bar to move up and down in the project tree. You can also use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys on your keyboard to move up and down in the project tree. Press the HOME button to navigate to the first item in the tree, and press the END button to navigate to the last item in the tree. You can change the size of the tree view by selecting any object in the tree view, rightclicking, then selecting the desired size in the pop-up menu (the choices are Small, Medium, and Large) Rev. A Using DesignShop

28 14 DesignShop Orientation If you are using the DesignShop product level or higher, you can perform editing on any project, design, element, or stitch list from within the tree view by selecting it, then right-clicking. You can also move items around in the tree by left-clicking them, then dragging and dropping them to the desired location. This tab is only relevant if you are working on ofm files that will be sewn on an AMAYA machine. In this tab, you can change the AMAYA machine settings that are stored with the design. If you sew the design on an AMAYA, when you load the design to the machine, these settings will be loaded with the design. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

29 DesignShop Orientation 15 The Stitches tab was designed to aid you with stitch point editing. It displays two windows. The first window is the Project window and the second is the Stitches window. The Stitches window shows all of the stitch points (which are numbered) for an entire project. These stitch points are editable in an expanded and wireframe elements (see pg. 96 for more information). To navigate through the expanded data list you can scroll using your mouse, or you can use the HOME, END, PAGE UP, and PAGE DOWN keys (or the Up/Down Arrow Keys) on your keyboard. You can also press ALT + Up/Down Arrow Keys to move 10 stitches in the list, or CTRL + Up/Down Arrow Keys to move 100 stitches. If you want to edit a particular expanded piece and can see it in the Project window, click on the icon in the Project window and it will take you to the beginning of that segment in the Stitches window. The above picture demonstrates this. When the outline of the yellow bear (selected in the above image) was clicked on, the expanded stitch list moved down and highlighted where the data for the yellow outline starts. The Navigator tab is a very useful tool within the tree view. Here you will find a small version (a thumbnail image) of your project. There are two ways of moving within a project using the navigator tool. One way to use the navigator is to left-click and drag while your cursor is in the view box (the red box). This view box represents the Rev. A Using DesignShop

30 16 DesignShop Orientation area that will be displayed in your View Window. The second way to use the navigator is to left-click in the thumbnail image of the navigator tab. The area that you click on will now be the center of the view box. As you use the zoom tools in the View Window, the size of the view box in the Navigator tab will increase or decrease. The Palette tab displays a large choice of colors. Each square represents a color. These colors are used to draw out your design in the View Window. Color one can be thought of as needle one on the peripheral, but the Color Palette does not control the peripheral. Colors are supplied to aid in visualizing what the final sew out will look like. Color one will sew out first, color two will sew out second, and so on. A number will appear on the color box in the color palette only when the color is active in the design. NOTE: The Color Palette also appears as a toolbar at the bottom of the DesignShop window. You can perform the same functions in this toolbar as you can in the Palette tab. To move colors around in the Color Palette, press and hold the ALT key, left-click on a color, then drag and drop it right before the desired position. If you drag the selected color box outside of the color palette area, it is deleted. Every color in the color palette is editable. To edit the colors, you can right-click on any color in the color palette. Once you right-click, a color menu will appear. The first menu item (Hide Color) hides the color that you right-clicked on. The second menu item (Show Color) shows the color if it is hidden. (You can also left-click a color to show or hide it.) If a color is hidden it will have an X on top of it. From the color menu, you can also hide or show all of the colors in the current design. The final menu item of the color menu is Properties. See Color Properties, pg. 89 for more information. If you would like to have one color displayed at a time in the View Window, to show the order of sewing for example, you can use the DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

31 Working with Files 17 Step Through Colors tool (displayed in the second box of the Color Palette) to step through the colors in the design. This tool only steps through hidden colors. Therefore, if you want to walk through all the colors in the design, hide all the colors in the design, then repeatedly click the Step Through Colors tool to display the colors one at a time. If you would like to change the color of the background (the View Window area behind the design), right-click on the first box in the color palette. The last box in the color palette represents the color wrap. This image is always displayed at the end of the colors in the Color Palette. See Color Properties, pg. 89 for more information. If you have saved any Custom Color Palettes, you may right click on the color palette, then click Load Custom Color Palette. Refer to pg. 92 for information on how to save Custom Color Palettes. Working with Files This section discusses all of the functions involved with working with embroidery and graphic files in DesignShop. New File You can create a new file in two ways: by selecting File->New or by clicking the New File toolbar button in the Main toolbar. This creates a new blank view window or project based on default settings. For tutorials related to Design- Shop files, see pg Open File You can open a file in two ways: by selecting File->Open or by clicking the Open File toolbar button in the Main toolbar. This will provide you with the Open dialog box. In this dialog box, you have the ability to browse for the desired file or project. You also Rev. A Using DesignShop

32 18 Working with Files have the ability to view a thumbnail image of each design as it is selected. The thumbnail image is displayed on the right side of the Open dialog box. With the Open dialog box, you can open embroidery files, project files, condensed files, expanded files, Tajima files, OFM files, and graphics files. NOTE: In the DesignShop and higher product levels, you will have an option on the open dialog box for Open graphics at resolution settings stored in file. If checked, this option will open graphics files at the resolution that they were saved at. If this option is unchecked, the graphic will open at 254 dpi (dots per inch). You can open the following formats: Commercial Formats Graphics Files (DesignShop and higher product levels) Melco Project Files (*.ofm) Melco Condensed Files (*.cnd) Melco Expanded Files (*.exp) Melco 3.5 Inch Floppy (non- DOS, regular & hi reliability) Tajima DOS (*.dst) Tajima Lo & Hi Density Floppy (non-dos) ZSK Floppy (non-dos) ZSK (DOS) (.zsk) Barudan FDR / FMC Floppy (non-dos) Barudan FDR / FMC (DOS) (*.fdr / *.fmc) Home Formats Brother/Babylock/Bernina (*.pec) Brother/Babylock/Bernina (*.pes) Janome / Elna Files (*.sew) Janome Files (*.pes, *.jef) Pfaff Files (*.pcs) Pfaff Macintosh (*.pcm) Poem/Singer Embroidery Files (*.csd) Singer (*.xxx) Husqvarna Vicking (*.hus) Oklahoma Embroidery.oef (read only) Elna (*.emd) Viking D1 (*.shv) Great Notions Condensed (*.gnc) (read only) Insert You can insert a file or project in two ways: by selecting File->Insert or by clicking the Insert tool button on the Main toolbar. This will DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

33 Working with Files 19 provide you with the Insert dialog box. In this dialog box, you have the ability to browse for the desired file or project. You also have the ability to view a thumbnail image of each design as it is selected. The thumbnail image is displayed on the right side of the Insert dialog box. With the Insert dialog box, you can insert a file into the current project. You have the ability to insert embroidery files, condensed files, expanded files, Tajima files, OFM files, and graphics files. When you insert a project file into another project file, the project file will be inserted as a design. You can insert the following types of files: Commercial Formats Graphics Files (DesignShop and higher product levels) Melco Condensed Files (*.cnd) Melco Expanded Files (*.exp) Melco 3.5 Inch Floppy (non- DOS, regular & hi reliability) Tajima DOS (*.dst) Tajima Lo & Hi Density Floppy (non-dos) ZSK Floppy (non-dos) ZSK (DOS) (.zsk) Barudan FDR / FMC Floppy (non-dos) Barudan FDR / FMC (DOS) (*.fdr / *.fmc) Home Formats Brother/Babylock/Bernina (*.pec) Brother/Babylock/Bernina (*.pes) Janome / Elna Files (*.sew) Janome Files (*.pes, *.jef) Pfaff Files (*.pcs) Pfaff Macintosh (*.pcm) Poem/Singer Embroidery Files (*.csd) Singer (*.xxx) Husqvarna Vicking (*.hus) Oklahoma Embroidery.oef (read only) Elna (*.emd) Viking D1 (*.shv) Great Notions Condensed (*.gnc) (read only) This function is useful when you want to insert two or more designs into the same project. When you have the first design open in the project, simply select File->Insert to insert another design. In the DesignShop and higher product levels, you will have an option on the insert dialog box for Open graphics at resolution settings stored in file. If checked, this option will insert graphics files at the resolution that they were saved at. If this option is unchecked, the graphic will insert at 254 dpi Rev. A Using DesignShop

34 20 Working with Files Save You can save a file in two ways: by selecting File->Save or by clicking the Save File toolbar button in the Main toolbar. This will save the active file with its current file name, location, and file format. If these properties have not already been defined, you will receive the Save As dialog box. Save As You can press the view in 3D button, save a design file file as a graphic file (*.bmp, *.pcx, *.jpg, *.tif) and give this file to anyone wanting to view what the sew out will look like. The graphic file can be opened in any graphics program, i.e. Paint, Paintshop, Photoshop, etc. When you select File->Save As or you receive the Save As dialog box when selecting the Save toolbar button, you will need to determine the file name, location, and format. You can save in the following formats: Commercial Formats Home Formats Project Files (*.ofm) Brother/Babylock/Bernina Melco Version 5.07, 4.02, 4.01, 3.00, (*.pec) 2.00 Brother/Babylock/Bernina Condensed Files (*.cnd) (*.pes) Expanded Files (*.exp) Janome / Elna Files (*.sew) Melco 3.5 Inch Floppy (non-dos, regular Janome Files (*.pes, *.jef) & hi reliability) Pfaff Files (*.pcs) Tajima Lo & Hi Density Floppy (non-dos) Pfaff Macintosh (*.pcm) ZSK Floppy (non-dos) Poem/Singer Embroidery Files ZSK (DOS) (.zsk) (*.csd) Barudan FDR Files (*.fdr) Singer (*.xxx) Barudan FMC Files (*.fmc) Husqvarna Vicking (*.hus) Baby Lock Files (*.pes) Elna (*.emd) Viking Files (*.hus) Viking D1 (*.shv) Bitmap Files (*.bmp) PCX Files (*.pcx) JPEG Files (*.jpg) TIFF Files (*.tif) (graphics files in DesignShop and higher product levels) DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

35 Working with Files 21 NOTE: DesignShop is capable of producing five types of OFM files: "Melco Version 5.07 (*.ofm), "Melco Version 4.02 (*.ofm),""melco Version 4.01 (*.ofm)," "Melco Version 3.00 (*.ofm)," and "Melco Version 2.00 (*.ofm)." To change the type of OFM file that is saved, select the desired file type from the Save as type pull-down menu in the Save As dialog box. Import and Export Some of the designs you work with may be on a floppy disk. DesignShop is compatible with DOS, Melco, Premier, Tajima, Barudan FDR and FMC, and ZSK disks, all of which have unique formats. The following chart outlines when to use each command: To perform this operation Load design file into DesignShop Save to hard drive (all files saved on the hard drive are DOS formats) Save to floppy disk Use this command for DOS formats Open or Import Save or Save As Save, Save As, or Export Use this command for non-dos formats Import Importing a Design To import a design, select File->Import. The Import dialog box will pop up. The steps for importing are illustrated below. If you click on the Options button while working with a Tajima format disk, a message box will ask you if you want to update the Boot Record of the disk. This refers to some Tajima disks that have an improper internal label and cannot be read by a DOS computer. If you have problems loading a Tajima disk, click on the Options button and respond Yes to the message. N/A Format the disk appropriately, then Export If you open an EDS III.OFM file in DesignShop and save it, it will no longer be readable in EDS III. Even when you choose the wrong format, Design- Shop will automatically select the correct format for you Rev. A Using DesignShop

36 22 Working with Files 1. Click on the desired format. 2. Click on the desired drive. 3. Click on the Directory button to browse for the location. 4. Select the file to import from the list of files. 5. Click the Import button. If you click on the Options button while working with a Tajima format disk, a message box will ask you if you want to update the Boot Record of the disk. This refers to some Tajima disks that have an improper internal label and cannot be read by a DOS computer. If you have problems loading a Tajima disk, click on the Options button and respond Yes to the message. Formatting Disks must be formatted to match the file type before a file can be written to it. You can format the disk from the Export or Import dialog box. Follow these steps to format a disk: 1. Select File->Import or File->Export to display the Import or Export dialog box. 2. Select the correct format. 3. Select the correct drive. 4. Click on Format to format the disk. Important Information on the Melco Format: The Melco format was developed to work with early Melco embroidery machines and other older embroidery products. Hardware required to read the Melco format is becoming increasingly difficult for Melco's suppliers to provide. Therefore, Melco cannot guarantee that it will be able to support the Melco format in the future. Melco recommends exporting designs in the Melco format ONLY when the equipment sewing the design requires the Melco format. Otherwise, save designs in the DOS format or the format associated with your particular embroidery product. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

37 Working with Files 23 Other embroidery formats supported by DesignShop are not affected by this situation. Exporting a Design Remember, a disk must be of the proper format before you can export a design to it. Select File->Export to display the Export dialog box. If you are not sure of the format, click on Unknown, then on the Directory button. DesignShop will determine the format of the disk and make the selection for you. Needle Sequence (for non-dos Disk and Tape Output): Needle Sequencing allows the user to produce designs that contain embedded needle sequence information particular to Barudan and ZSK multi-head peripherals. The Needle Sequence dialog box is displayed when you click on the Options button in the Export dialog box. The number of allowed Needle Sequences (i.e., color changes) has increased from 7 to 99. Currently, the maximum needle value is 7. File Name Standards The filename conventions for floppy disk formats are given below. These rules must be followed for the disk to be read by other Rev. A Using DesignShop

38 24 Working with Files systems: DOS Format DOS format names consist of a 1-8 character filename and one of the following extensions:.cnd - Condensed Format.EXP - Expanded Format.OFM - Project (Layout format) Barudan FDR Format Barudan FDR uses a numeric format. The file number can be from 1 to 99. In addition, a label of up to 8 characters is allowed. The number and the label must be separated by a colon. Examples: 3 26:SNAIL Barudan FMC Format Barudan FMC uses a numeric format. The file number can be from 1 to 99. In addition, a colon can be entered after the number. No character labels are allowed. Examples: 3 26: Melco Format MELCO format names consist of a 1-6 character filename and one of the following extensions:.cnd - Condensed Format.EXP - Expanded Format Tajima Format Tajima format uses a numeric format with numbers ranging from Any 1-8 character name is also supported. In addition to a DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

39 Working with Files 25 filename, a 1-8 character label can be specified after the filename and separated by a colon (like the Barudan FDR format.) Examples: 1 G001 (How the old Tajima format stored the name 1) 1:TEST APPLE:TEST (The new Tajima Format) ZSK Format Zsk format uses a numeric format with numbers ranging from Examples: Send (Available in DesignShop, DesignShop Pro, DesignShop Pro +) You can easily designs from within DesignShop. When you are ready to a design (for example, you have completed digitizing a design and need to send it out), select File->Send. This will create a blank message (using your default program) with the current project file as an attachment Rev. A Using DesignShop

40 26 Working with Files Print You can print a design in 3D view by clicking the View Stitches in 3D button then printing. When you click on the Print tool, you will get a dialog page where you can select the printer, number of copies, and what to print. When choosing what to print, you have the option of printing the Design, the Status/Notes, and the Object (stitch) list. (Simply leftclick the checkboxes). If you have the grid or the design origin turned on (displayed), you can print these as well. If you have changed the background color (so that it is no longer white), you can also print the design with this background color. You can also print a company logo at the top of a DesignShop design printout. To do this, click the checkbox next to Print Logo. Then click the Browse button to select the graphics file (it must be a bitmap) you wish to insert. When the logo is inserted, it is centered at the top of the printout. You cannot resize the logo once it is inserted; all resizing must be done before inserting the file. It has been determined that 7.6 x 1.2 inches is the ideal logo size. If the logo is any larger than this recommended size, the entire logo will not be visible. As long as the Print Logo box is checked, the logo you have selected will appear on all DesignShop design printouts. You can click the Browse button to select another graphics file at any time. If you move or delete the graphic that you have selected to print, the Print Logo function will not work. Print is also located under the File menu along with Print Preview and Print Setup... File-> Print Preview: Allows you to preview what the printout will look like. File->Print Setup: Allows you to set up your print options without printing. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

41 Working with Files 27 DesignShop Files and AMAYA OS If you are using both DesignShop 2004 (or higher) and AMAYA OS 2004 (or higher), both of these programs have tools built in that allow the transfer of files between the two programs. To send a design to the AMAYA machine from DesignShop, select Machine- >Load Design (you can also select Machine->Add to Job List to place a design on the machine Job List). When you have a file loaded in AMAYA OS, and you want to edit the file in DesignShop, click the DesignShop logo button. This will open the design in a DesignShop window. If you do not have both DesignShop 2004 (or higher) and AMAYA OS 2004 (or higher), you cannot send a design to an AMAYA machine from DesignShop. To sew a design you have been working on in DesignShop, save the design in DesignShop, then open it in AMAYA OS. Please note that machine settings (such as material thickness) will be saved with ofm files. You can edit these machine settings in DesignShop in the Machine Settings property tab. For this to work correctly with ofm files, ofm files that are saved from AMAYA OS should be saved as a file version that can be opened by DesignShop (and vice versa, files that are saved from DesignShop should be saved as a file version that can be opened by AMAYA OS). Please see the table below to determine which ofm file versions can be opened with your versions of AMAYA OS and DesignShop. (Select Rev. A Using DesignShop

42 28 Basic Functions Help->About in the program to determine the program version). Program Version DesignShop ver and higher AMAYA OS ver and higher DesignShop ver and higher (lower than ) AMAYA OS ver and higher (lower than ) DesignShop ver and below AMAYA OS ver and below Basic Functions OFM File Versions Melco Version 5.07 ofm Melco Version 4.02 ofm Melco Version 4.01 ofm Melco Version 3.00 ofm Melco Version 2.00 ofm Melco Version 4.02 ofm Melco Version 4.01 ofm Melco Version 3.00 ofm Melco Version 2.00 ofm Melco Version 4.01 ofm Melco Version 3.00 ofm Melco Version 2.00 ofm For tutorials related to Design- Shop basic functionality, see pg This section describes the basic functions involved with manipulating items such as designs, elements (e.g., columns), and points in DesignShop. Copy This function copies the selected item(s) to the clipboard; then it/they can be pasted into another location if desired. You can access this function in four ways: you can press CTRL + C on your keyboard, you can click the Copy toolbar button, you can select Edit->Copy, or you can right-click the selected item(s) in the View Window (or the Project View tab) and select Copy from the pop-up menu. Cut This function removes a selected item (or items), and places it/them on the clipboard where it/they can be pasted into another location if DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

43 Basic Functions 29 desired. This function can also be used to delete items. You can access this function in four ways: you can press CTRL + X on your keyboard, you can click the Cut toolbar button, you can select Edit->Cut, or you can right-click the selected item(s) in the View Window (or the Project View tab) and select Cut from the pop-up menu. Paste This function inserts the contents of the clipboard into the area that you have selected with your cursor and replaces any item or element that is selected. You can only use paste after you have cut or copied an item to the clipboard. You can access this function in four ways: you can press CTRL + V on your keyboard, you can click the Paste toolbar button, you can select Edit->Paste, or you can right-click in the View Window (or the Project View tab) and select Paste from the pop-up menu. Delete This function deletes whatever item(s) you have selected. You can access this function in three ways: you can press the DELETE key on your keyboard, you can select Edit->Delete, or you can right-click the selected item(s) in the View Window (or the Project View tab), right-click, and select Delete from the pop-up menu. Duplicate This function duplicates whatever item(s) you have selected. When you duplicate an item (e.g., an entire design, a fill, etc.) this item is copied and then pasted into the project directly after the original item. You can access this function in three ways: you can press CTRL + D on your keyboard, you can select Edit->Duplicate, or you can rightclick the selected item(s) in the View Window (or the Project View tab), and select Duplicate from the pop-up menu. Undo This function is used to undo certain actions. Not all actions are Rev. A Using DesignShop

44 30 Basic Functions supported by Undo. Clicking the drop-down arrow next to the Undo toolbar button will display a list of actions you have performed that may be undone. In this box you can left-click and drag the mouse to highlight the actions you want to undo. You can only undo actions in the opposite order that you performed them. You can access this function in three ways: you can press CTRL + Z on your keyboard, you can click the Undo toolbar button, or you can select Edit->Undo. Redo This function is used to redo certain actions on which you used the Undo tool. Not all actions are supported by Redo. Clicking the dropdown arrow next to the Redo toolbar button will display a list of actions you have performed that may be redone. In this box you can left-click and drag the mouse to highlight the actions you want to redo. You can only redo actions in the opposite order that you undid them. You can access this function in three ways: you can press CTRL + Y on your keyboard, you can click the Redo toolbar button, or you can select Edit->Redo. Find Under the Edit menu, you will see a dialog to search for elements within the project view (Edit->Find). When the dialog appears, click on the down arrow to choose the element type to search for, then click Go To. This will highlight the element type you choose to search for within the project view. You can also be more specific and enter the number of the stitch or element. You can also access this function by pressing CTRL + F on your keyboard. Global Scale Factor (Available in DesignShop, DesignShop Pro, DesignShop Pro +) DesignShop allows you to globally (throughout an entire design) scale some properties of wireframe elements. To access these scale factors, select Edit->Scale Factors. You will then see the following dialog: DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

45 Basic Tools 31 This dialog allows you to increase or decrease certain properties by percentages. For example, you can increase the density of all fills by 30% by entering 130% in the Fill Density text box. Column Density: This will scale the density all columns. Column Fill Density: This will scale the density of all column fills. Column Fill Stitch Length: This will scale the stitch length of all column fill stitches. Walk/Underlay Stitch Length: This will scale the stitch length of all walk and underlay stitches. Fill Density: This will scale the density of all fills. Fill Stitch Length: This will scale the stitch length of all fills. Basic Tools This section describes the basic tools in DesignShop that provide assistance as you edit and/or digitize. Ruler This is a very useful tool if you would like to measure elements. This function is located as a toolbar button and also under the View Rev. A Using DesignShop

46 32 Basic Tools menu (View->Ruler). You can change the units of measure by selecting Tools->Options, then clicking on the Measurement Units tab. Look for Ruler in the list and select your preferred measurement units (left-click in the radio button). Besides pressing the toolbar button to turn on the ruler, you can also press R on your keyboard. To use this feature, first click the Ruler toolbar button. Then click on the starting point from which you would like to measure and drag your mouse to the endpoint of your measurement. While doing this look on the bottom of your screen on the status bar to view the measurement. Let go of your mouse button to start a new measurement. To turn off the Ruler feature, click on the Ruler toolbar button again. Show Grid Clicking the Show Grid button displays a framework of evenly spaced vertical and horizontal black (default color) lines behind the design in the View Window. (Click the Show Grid button again to turn off the grid). The default setting for the spacing of the grid is 0.5 inches. All default settings can be changed by right-clicking the tool and entering the Grid and Origin properties dialog (See Grid and Origin Properties below). You can also display/turn off the grid by selecting View->Show Grid. See pg. 106 for information on using the grid as an alignment tool. Show Origin Clicking the Show Origin button displays two gray (default color) lines along the center X and Y axis of the View Window. The intersection of the two lines indicates the location of the origin and center of the design. When you center your design, it will be centered at this origin. All default settings can be changed by right-clicking the Show Origin tool and entering the Grid and Origin properties dialog (See Grid and Origin Properties below). You can also display/turn off the design origin by selecting View->Show Origin. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

47 Basic Tools 33 Grid and Origin Properties To view Grid and Design Origin properties, right-click the Show Grid or the Show Design Origin toolbar button. Origin: You can click in the box next to Show Origin to display or not display the origin lines in the View Window. A check mark in the box symbolizes that the origin lines will be displayed, whereas no check mark symbolizes that the origin lines will not be displayed. Origin Color: If you would like to change the color of the origin lines, click on the box next to Origin Color: This will take you to a color dialog where you can choose another color, then click OK. The default color is black. Origin Type: You can choose whether you would like the origin lines to be displayed as lines or as dotted lines. To do this, leftclick the radio button next to the desired choice. Grid: You can click in the box next to Display Grid to display or not to display the grid lines in the View Window. A check mark in the box symbolizes that the grid lines will be displayed, whereas no check mark symbolizes that the grid lines will not be displayed. Grid Color: If you would like to change the color of the grid lines, click on the box next to Grid Color:. This will take you to a Rev. A Using DesignShop

48 34 Basic Tools color dialog where you can choose another color then click OK. The default color is gray. Grid Spacing: This gives you the option to change the spacing between the grid lines. Click in the white area next to Horizontal: to change the spacing between the horizontal lines. After clicking in the white area simply type in a desired measurement. You can also use the up and down arrows to change the measurement value. Click in the white area next to Vertical: to change the spacing between the vertical lines. Grid Type: You can choose whether you would like the grid lines to be displayed as lines or as dotted lines. To do this, click in the radio button next to the desired choice. Method: This gives you the option to display only horizontal lines, only vertical lines, or both horizontal and vertical lines. To do this, click in the radio button next to the desired choice. Display Above Embroidery Objects: Click in the box next to this option to display the grid and origin lines above the embroidery that is in the View Window. A check mark in the box symbolizes that the lines will be displayed in front of (above) the embroidery, whereas having no check mark in the box symbolizes that the lines will be behind the embroidery. Save As Default: Any time that you change a setting or settings and click the Save As Default button, your changes will be saved. Even if you exit out of DesignShop and get back in again, your default settings will be saved. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

49 Basic Tools 35 Show Stitches in 3D Clicking this toolbar button will generate the stitches of a design in the View Window in a three dimensional perspective. (Click this button again to turn this feature off). This will give you a general idea of how the design will look when sewn. You can also hold down the ALT key and press 3 to turn on View Stitches in 3D. Hide/Show Stitches Click this toolbar button to hide the stitches in an element or design. This tool will hide all of the stitches in selected item(s). (Click again to show the stitches.) NOTE: To hide stitches in unselected items, select View->Hide Nonselected. To show all stitches again, select View->Show All. Zoom Graphical Zoom in allows you to click and drag a box around the area that you would like to zoom in on. This operation is more specific than Zoom in. Zoom in enlarges a portion of the design on the screen. To move to a different portion use the scroll bars. This is useful for more precise editing. It does not affect sewing size. Zoom out decreases the design size on the screen. It does not affect sewing size. You can print a design in 3D view after pressing the View Stitches in 3D button, then print. Besides pressing the toolbar button to use zoom in, you can also use a keyboard shortcut by pressing + on your keyboard. Zoom actual displays on the screen the actual sewing size of a design. After changing the design view, click this tool to bring the design view back to its actual sewing size Rev. A Using DesignShop

50 36 Customizing your Work Environment Zoom to fit will increase or decrease the design size to fit the entire design on the screen. Click this tool to display the full design. It does not affect sewing size. Keyboard Shortcuts: Zoom Out - Zoom Actual A Zoom to Fit F Zoom Previous L Fit Selection Zoom allows you to zoom in on a specific area that you would like to edit. After you have an area selected to edit, click on the fit selection tool. Zoom previous will return the design size on screen to the previous zoom level. It does not affect sewing size. You can find all of the Zoom functions in two locations: as buttons on the View toolbar or as menu items under the View Menu. Customizing your Work Environment DesignShop offers many tools that allow you to customize your work environment to your preferences. This section describes these tools. Inserting Design Notes Once you have saved notes to your designs, you will see a picture of the notes tool added to the top level project in the project view. Design Notes is a useful tool for documenting information about designs (e.g., maximum & minimum height, width, stitch count, colors, etc.). To insert notes, simply click on the Design Notes tool in the Main toolbar. (If the project you are working in already contains design notes, you will see text in the window that appears.) Type the desired text and save the design notes file. To view design notes, right-click the top level project in the stitch list and select Design Notes from the pop-up menu. You can also select View->Design Notes or click the Design Notes toolbar button. See pg. 41 for instructions on how to change the editor used to create design notes. Customizing Projects In DesignShop, it is very easy to customize projects to adapt them to your preferences. Right-click the project in the Project Tree View, DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

51 Customizing your Work Environment 37 select Properties from the pop-up menu. (See image below). Then click on the Project tab, and the following dialog will be displayed (you can also double-click the project to view this dialog): File: The location and file name of the project will be displayed here. Project Level Settings: These settings let you change the Maximum Stitch Length for all elements within a project and the Connector Stitch Length throughout a project; you can also turn on/off Return To Origin at the project level (the default is On). Workspace Area: The Workspace Area is the area within the View Window where you do your editing and digitizing. If your stitches Rev. A Using DesignShop

52 38 Customizing your Work Environment fall out of the Workspace Area, you can use the scroll bars to move around your project. You can also change the height and the width measurements by clicking in the white area and typing the desired measurement. The default settings are 16 inches by 16 inches. You can click the Save As Default button to have new projects open with the desired measurements. Save As Default: Any time that you change a setting or settings and click the Save As Default button your changes will be saved and will become the default settings. Even if you exit out of DesignShop and get back in again, your default settings will be saved. Naming Designs Naming the designs in your projects is another way that you can customize your work environment. There are several ways that you can rename designs. If you right-click the design in the Project Tree View, select Properties from the pop-up menu, then click on the Design tab, the following dialog will be displayed (you can also double-click the design name to view this dialog): This will display the name of the design. You can change the design name by clicking in the white area, selecting the text, and typing the desired name. You also can select the design in the Project Tree View, press the F2 button on your keyboard, type in the design name and press ENTER. Changing Background Color If you would like to change the color of the background of your DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

53 Customizing your Work Environment 39 workspace (the View Window area behind the design), right-click on the first box in the color palette from the pop-up menu. This will open the Color Properties dialog: and select Properties Notice that the color number box is labeled Background Color, and the number in the box is 0. (This means that the color number of the background color is always 0.) Select a background color from the color chart and click OK. Graphic Background You can also display a graphic as the background of your workspace. The purpose of a graphic background is to provide a view of the embroidery design against a graphic of fabric. To display a fabric on your screen, right-click on any existing color box in the Color Palette and select Properties to display the Color Properties dialog box. Click on the Graphic Background tab. You can now select a fabric file that will be displayed into the background of the View Window. To display a fabric, click the Browse button. Navigate to the DesignShop install directory (usually C: Program Files directory/melco Embroidery Systems/DesignShop/ Rev. A Using DesignShop

54 40 Customizing your Work Environment Fabrics). While in this directory you will be able to see thumbnail images of the graphic backgrounds/fabrics. Select a fabric from the list and click Open. Click Apply to immediately see the fabric on your screen. If you want to turn off the graphic background, check (left-click)) the box next to No Graphic Background. Redraw/Redraw Speed You can adjust Design View's redraw speed (the speed at which designs are redrawn). To do this, select View->Redraw Speed. You will see the following dialog. Left-click and drag the slider to adjust the redraw speed. When you click the Play button, the design will continuously redraw until you click the Stop button (left button) or the Pause button, or close the Redraw Speed dialog. When you click play after clicking pause, the design will begin continue redrawing from where it stopped. When DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

55 Customizing your Work Environment 41 you click play after clicking stop, the design will be redrawn from the beginning. You can continue working in the View Window while this dialog is open. You can redraw a design at any time by selecting View->Redraw. Preferences Tab The Preferences tab allows you to adjust several DesignShop settings. To access these settings, select Tool->Options, then click the Preferences tab. Auto Scroll: Auto Scroll works as you are in the middle of digitizing an element. When you move your cursor out of the View Window, auto scroll will scroll the View Window to follow the direction of your cursor. You can change the speed of the auto scroll from 1 to 10, with 10 being the fastest. NOTE: This feature is available in DesignShop, DesignShop Pro, DesignShop Pro +. Notes Editor: If you choose to use a different editor than the default (Microsoft Word, for example), click in the radio button next to Specify Editor and then browse to the desired editor. Notepad is the default editor Rev. A Using DesignShop

56 42 Customizing your Work Environment Digitizing Cursors: (Available in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro + only) This setting allows you to choose from several available digitizing cursors (the cursor that is visible while you are digitizing). The choices are: Arrow (which is the default), Small/Large Crosshairs, and Small/ Large Eye Crosshairs. To select a different digitizing cursor, left-click the cursor s radio button and click the Apply button. File Options You can change DesignShop file options by selecting Tools->Options, then selecting the File Options tab. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

57 Customizing your Work Environment 43 Auto Save: You can turn auto save on or off by clicking in the box next to Auto Save. A check mark in the box symbolizes that auto save is on, click again to remove the check which symbolizes that auto save is off. Next to Interval you can insert a number that will determine how often auto save will save your file. Open File: You can have your files open up to actual size or to fit the whole screen. Open Graphics at Resolution stored in file: If checked, this option will open graphics files at the resolution that they were saved at. If this option is unchecked, the graphic will open at 254 dpi (dots per inch). Preserve Condensed Connectors On Open: When this is checked DesignShop will create a jumpstitch object for each portion of a condensed design that was in the needle up mode. If the box is not checked the needle up sections of the condensed design are discarded and DesignShop automatically creates connectors to move between sections of the design. Measurement Units You can change the measurement units by selecting Tools->Options, then selecting the Measurement Units tab. You have the option of changing the measurement units on the properties listed. You can have the units in embroidery points, millimeters, centimeters, or inches. If your computer stops responding while you are working in Design- Shop, the next time you open DesignShop you will be given the option to recover any work that was saved with Auto Save. After the recovered files are open you should save them with a new name. Do not save them in the temp directory because these files are managed by DesignShop and will be deleted Rev. A Using DesignShop

58 44 Customizing your Work Environment Editing Properties Tab NOTE: The Editing Properties tab is only available in the Design- Shop and higher product levels. To access editing properties, select Tools->Options, then click the Editing Properties tab. Point Size You have the option of changing the size of wireframe and stitch points when you view them in the View Window. The default is DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

59 Customizing your Work Environment 45 Large (12 pixel). After you change the size, any points you digitize will be the new size. However, previously digitized points will not reflect the size change. If you close DesignShop, then re-open it, all points will reflect the size change. Constrained Line Input DesignShop allows you to input a straight horizontal, vertical, or angled line. To do this, use the following procedure: 1. Select the digitizing tool you wish to use (e.g., walk stitch). 2. Input the first digitized point. 3. Press and hold down the ALT key on your keyboard. You will see a line appear on your screen. 4. Move the mouse to the desired position of the line. Notice that the line will only be drawn at certain angles. This is based on the contained line angle value that is entered in the Editing Properties tab. The default value is 15 degrees, but you can enter any value you choose (between 1 and 90 degrees). 5. Enter the next point at the desired location. A line will then be drawn. You can also use the constrained line when editing wireframe lines. To do this, select a point you want to move. Press and hold down the ALT key as you drag the point. Notice that the wireframe line is straight and is displayed at certain angles (e.g., every 15 degrees) Rev. A Using DesignShop

60 46 Customizing your Work Environment DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

61 3. EDITING IN THIS CHAPTER: Editing Levels Editing Properties Editing Points Editing Tools Rev. A Melco Embroidery Systems

62 48 Editing Levels Editing Levels DesignShop allows you to edit designs at all levels. This means you can edit at the project level, design level, element level, and stitch point level. This section provides an overview of editing at these different levels. Editing at the Project Level The project level is the highest level of DesignShop. The project encompasses designs, lettering, elements, etc. When you make a change at the project level, this change affects the entire project. For example, if you have two designs within the same project, when you make a change at the project level, both of the designs will be affected. To make changes at the project level, you must first select the project. To select the project, you can left-click the project in the Project Tree View (see image below), you can select View->Select All, or you can press CTRL+A on your keyboard. Once the project is selected, you can edit the properties of the entire project by right-clicking the project name in the Project Tree View and selecting Properties from the pop-up menu (or by doubleclicking the project name). You can also select View->Properties from the DesignShop menus. In the Project Properties dialog you will see the following tabs. The tabs that are visible to you will depend on the DesignShop product level you have. Project tab: This tab allows you to change the settings for your project. See Customizing Projects, pg. 36, for a description of this tab. Lock/trim tab: Changing anything on this tab will affect the lock DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

63 Editing Levels 49 stitches and trim properties for the entire project. See Lock/Trim Tab, pg. 54 for a description of this tab. Lettering tab: Changing anything on this tab affects the lettering properties for the entire project. See Lettering Properties, pg. 121, for a description of this tab. Column, Walk, Fill, and Singleline tabs: Changing anything in these tabs at the project level affects all elements of that type throughout the project (e.g., changing anything on the Column tab will affect all columns). See the properties section for each element type (Column Properties, pg. 69, Fill Properties, pg. 76, Walk Stitch Properties, pg. 66) for information on editing these elements. NOTE: You will only have access to these tabs if the project contains these elements. View tab: Changing anything on this tab will affect what is displayed in the project. See View Tab, pg. 53, for more information on this tab. Position tab: Changing anything on this tab will alter the position of the entire project. See Position Tab, pg. 59, for more information on this tab. Scale tab: This tab allows you to scale the entire project. See Scale Tab, pg. 60, for more information on this tab. Status tab: This tab displays information about the project. See Status Tab, pg. 62, for more information on this tab. You cannot perform functions such as Copy and Paste at the project level. You can, however, use the Find function at the project level. See Find, pg. 30 for information on this function. You can also scale factors at the project level. See Global Scale Factor, pg. 30 for information on this function. Editing at the Design Level The design level is the next level of DesignShop. When you make a change at the design level, this change affects the entire selected design. To make changes at the design level, you must first select a design Rev. A Editing

64 50 Editing Levels To select the design, left-click the design in the Project Tree View. (You can also hold down the left mouse button to draw a box around the entire design in the View Window to select it). Once the design is selected, you can edit the properties of the entire design by right-clicking the design name in the Project Tree View and selecting Properties from the pop-up menu (or by doubleclicking the design name). You can also select View->Properties from the DesignShop menus. (If you have selected the entire design in the View Window, you can double-click the selected design.) In the Design Properties dialog you will see the following tabs: Design tab: This tab allows you to change the design name. See Naming Designs, pg. 38, for a description of this tab. Lock/trim tab: Changing anything on this tab will affect the lock stitches and trim properties for the selected design. See Lock/Trim Tab, pg. 54 for a description of this tab. Column, Walk, Fill, and Singleline tabs: Changing anything in these tabs at the design level affects all elements of that type throughout the design (e.g., changing anything on the Column tab will affect all columns in the design). See the properties section for each element type (Column Properties, pg. 69, Fill Properties, pg. 76, Walk Stitch Properties, pg. 66) for information on editing these elements. NOTE: You will only have access to these tabs if the selected design contains these elements. View tab: Changing anything on this tab will affect what is displayed in the design. See View Tab, pg. 53, for more information on this tab. Position tab: Changing anything on this tab will alter the position of the entire design. See Position Tab, pg. 59, for more information on this tab. Scale tab: This tab allows you to scale the entire design. See Scale Tab, pg. 60, for more information on this tab. Status tab: This tab displays information about the design. See Status Tab, pg. 62, for more information on this tab. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

65 Editing Levels 51 NOTE: In expanded designs, you have only access to the following tabs: View, Position, Scale, and Status. You will also have access to an additional tab, Stitch Processing (see pg. 61). You can perform all basic functions such as copy, paste, and scale factors at the design level. See Basic Functions, pg. 28, for information on these functions. Editing at the Element Level The element level is the next level of DesignShop. An element is an DesignShop term that describes the smallest component of a design that consists of multiple points. The design elements of DesignShop are Manual Stitch, Walk Stitch (normal, bean, and decorative), Column 1 and Column 2, Complex Column, Singleline (center, left, and right), Complex Fill, and Lettering. NOTE: You can only make changes at the element level if you have the DesignShop product level or higher. To make changes at the element level, you must first select an element. To select an element, left-click the element in the Project Tree View. (You can also left-click the element in the View Window to select it). Once the element is selected, you can edit the properties of the element by right-clicking the element in the Project Tree View or the View Window and selecting Properties from the pop-up menu (or by double-clicking the element). You can also select View->Properties from the DesignShop menus or double-click the element in the View Window. In the Element Properties dialog you will see the following tabs: Column/Walk/Fill tab: Changing anything in this tab will change the properties of the element. See the properties section for each element type (Column Properties, pg. 69, Fill Properties, pg. 76, Walk Stitch Properties, pg. 66) for information on editing these elements. Lock/trim tab: Changing anything on this tab will affect the lock stitches and trim properties for the selected element. See Lock/Trim Tab, pg. 54 for a description of this tab Rev. A Editing

66 52 Editing Properties View tab: Changing anything on this tab will affect what is displayed in the element. See View Tab, pg. 53, for more information on this tab. Position tab: Changing anything on this tab will alter the position of the element. See Position Tab, pg. 59, for more information on this tab. Scale tab: This tab allows you to scale the element. See Scale Tab, pg. 60, for more information on this tab. Status tab: This tab displays information about the element. See Status Tab, pg. 62, for more information on this tab. NOTE: Because expanded designs do not contain elements, you cannot edit at the element level in these designs. You can however, edit the pieces of expanded data. Therefore, in expanded designs, you have access to the following tabs: View, Position, Scale, and Status. You will also have access to an additional tab, Stitch Processing, pg. 61. You can perform all basic functions such as Copy, Paste, and Scale Factors at the element level. See Basic Functions, pg. 28, for information on these functions. NOTE: You can select multiple elements at the same time, then edit all of the selected elements at the same time. See Selection Tools, pg. 99, for more information on this topic. Editing at the Point Level The lowest editing level is the point level. You can edit wireframe points in elements that contain this type of point. You can also edit stitch points in both wireframe and expanded elements. See Working with Points, pg. 94, for more detailed information about editing points. NOTE: You can only make changes at the point level if you have the DesignShop product level or higher. Editing Properties Much of the editing in DesignShop involves adjusting the properties DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

67 Editing Properties 53 of projects, designs, and elements. The previous section discussed how to access these properties. This section provides more detailed information on how to adjust these properties. NOTE: Any time that you are in a property page, you can click Apply after making a change and it will immediately apply your change. The advantage of using Apply versus clicking OK after a change is that you can apply your changes and still move on to making other changes. Once you click on OK, your changes will be applied, the property dialog will close, and you will be back at the View Window. You can also click Cancel and the property dialogs will close without implementing the last change. NOTE: Any time that you change a setting or settings on a property page and click the Save As Default button your changes will be saved. When you close DesignShop and then re-open it, your default settings will be saved. View Tab When you access the properties of a project, design, or element, you will see the View tab in the properties dialog (see the following image). In the View tab, you can choose what you would like to display in the View Window. To show these items in the View Window, click in the box that is to the left of the option. A check mark in the box Rev. A Editing

68 54 Editing Properties symbolizes that the option will be displayed. Click again to remove the check mark; this symbolizes that the option will not be displayed. Remember that you can use the View tab at the project, design, or element level (element level editing is available in the DesignShop product level and higher). Show Connectors: This lets you view the connecting lines between elements. Basically they can be thought of as the needle movement from a tie off on one element to the tie in of another element. Connectors are viewed as dotted black lines in the View Window. Show Expanded Points: This lets you view the expanded points of a design. Show Stitches: This lets you view the stitches as they would appear in a sew-out. Show Wireframe Lines: This lets you view the wireframe outline of the element(s). Show Wireframe Points: This lets you view the wireframe points of the element(s). Show Tie Ins and Tie Offs: This allows you to view the tie ins and tie offs (if they are turned on). Lock Stitch/Trim Tab When you access the properties of a project, design, or element, you will also see the Lock/Trim tab in the properties dialog (see the following image). DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

69 Editing Properties 55 Remember that you can use the Lock/Trim tab at the project, design, or element level (element level available in the DesignShop or higher product levels). Lock stitches are several small stitches sewn to prevent stitching from being pulled out. The term tie in refers to lock stitches that are placed at the beginning of an embroidery element to lock the first stitches into place. The term tie off refers to lock stitches at the end of an embroidery element to lock the last stitches into place. (See pg. 98 for information on editing tie in/off stitches.) None: No automatic lock stitches will be inserted. Tie In & Tie Off: Inserts tie ins and tie offs based on what is selected in the When to Tie pull-down menu. If Always is selected: Tie ins and tie offs will be inserted in all selected elements (including trims and color changes). If Only When Necessary is selected: Tie ins will be inserted at the beginning of the design and after all color changes and trims Rev. A Editing

70 56 Editing Properties Tie offs will be inserted at the end of the design and before all color changes and trims. Tie In: Inserts tie ins based on what is selected in the When to Tie pull-down menu. If Always is selected: Tie ins will be inserted before all selected elements, at the beginning of the design, and after all color changes and trims. If Only When Necessary is selected: Tie ins will only be inserted at the beginning of the design and after all color changes and trims. Tie Off: Inserts tie offs based on what is selected in the When to Tie pull-down menu. If Always is selected: Tie offs will be inserted after all selected elements, at the end of the design, and before all color changes and trims. If Only When Necessary is selected: Tie offs will only be inserted at the end of the design and before all color changes and trims. Tie In Type: This pull-down menu allows you to select the style of tie in used by DesignShop. To select a style, left-click the pull-down arrow, then left-click the style you wish to select. (This feature is only available in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro +.) To preview the styles, click the button next to the pull-down menu. You will see this window: DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

71 Editing Properties 57 Style 1: This is a traditional pattern that doubles back on itself several times at the beginning of the stitching in the object. This pattern will automatically adjust its stitch length, stitch count, and position based on the type and size of the object. In a walk or fill object the pattern will be placed along the first stitch, in column object types the pattern will be moved in several stitches from the end of the object so it will not protrude from under the stitches. Style 2: This pattern places one extra stitch at the next to last needle penetration. This is a very simple lock stitch type that would work well with walk or fill objects when it is critical that extra stitches are not visible. This lock stitch pattern is not intended for use with columns wider than about 10 pts. Style 3: Another simple stitch reverse pattern similar to type 2, the type 3 pattern places stitches in the two penetrations before the end of the object. This lock stitch type will also work well with walk, fill, and narrow (<=10pts) column objects. Style 4: This pattern is a modification of the traditional patterns that reverses on itself. This pattern straddles the first needle penetration of the object. For this reason the pattern is not suitable for use in a column type object since the lock stitches will be visible outside of the object boundaries. It should only be used for walk objects where the lock stitches will be covered by later stitching. Style 5: This is a small traditional crossing star pattern consisting of three needle penetrations. This pattern automatically calculates its position in column objects so it will be inside the boundaries of the object. In walk and fill objects it will be placed between the first and second needle penetrations and will protrude out of the object boundaries. The type 5 pattern is suitable for most column type objects, but should only be used for walk and fill objects if the protruding stitches will be covered by later stitching. Select a style from this window by left-clicking the radio button next to the style, then clicking OK. Tie Off Type: This pull-down menu allows you to select the style of Rev. A Editing

72 58 Editing Properties tie off used by DesignShop. To select a style, left-click the pull-down arrow, then left-click the style you wish to select. You can also preview tie off styles and select them from the preview window. This feature is only available in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro +. Lock Stitch If Connector Greater Than: You can click in the box next to this function to have lock stitches inserted only when the connector length (distance between two elements) is greater than a desired length. A check mark in the box symbolizes that this function is on, whereas no check mark symbolizes that this function is off. To specify length, click in the white area next to this option and enter the length. Trim If Connector Greater Than: You can click in the box next to this function to have trims inserted when the connector (distance between two elements) is greater than a desired length. A check mark in the box symbolizes that this function is on, whereas no check mark symbolizes that this function is off. To specify length, click in the text box next to this function and enter the length. The Lock/Trim Tab allows you to make lock and trim settings per element, including the connector length settings. In the situation where multiple elements are selected: If the elements do not all have the same lock settings, then the property page will not have any of the choices selected. If you select one, then all of the selected elements will now have that option. If some of the elements have trim on and others off, the Trim checkbox will display a gray check mark. If the elements do not all have the same connector greater than fields, then a 0 will be displayed. Lock Stitches and Trims for Lettering All of the Lock Stitch properties also apply to the individual letters in a lettering element as well. Please consider the following tips when it comes to lettering: DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

73 Editing Properties 59 Many alphabets already have (tie off) lock stitches already in them. If lock stitches are turned on through the Lock/Trim properties, existing lock stitches will not be deleted and additional lock stitches may be generated. When Trim if connector greater than is on, it places a trim command at the end of each letter in a lettering element, but trims that are generated through the function will not be displayed in the text box on the Lettering Tab. Update Auto Lock/Trim Any time that you make a change to the Lock/Trim Property page, you should click the Auto Lock/Trim button to update your project, stitchlist, etc. When you save your.ofm file as a.cnd or.exp file the locks and trims will be automatically updated, but it is still a good idea to always click this button after changing the Lock/Trim Property page. You can also perform this function by selecting Insert->Auto Locks & Trims. Position Tab When you access the properties of a project, design, or element, you will also see the Position tab in the properties dialog (see the following image). Remember that you can use the Position tab at the project, design, or element level (element level editing is only available in the DesignShop and higher product levels) Rev. A Editing

74 60 Editing Properties Orientation: Sometimes orientation must be altered for proper results. To change the orientation, click the F to the right of Orientation until the desired orientation displays. Rotate: Positive degree values rotate the element clockwise and negative degree values rotate the element counter-clockwise. X: This type of movement will move the item to the left or right on the X axis in inch values. Positive values move the item to the right. Negative values move the element to the left. Y: This type of movement will move the item up or down the Y axis in inch values. Positive values move the item up. Negative values move the item down. Scale Tab When you access the properties of a project, design, or element, you will also see the Scale tab in the properties dialog (see the following image). By scaling, you can reduce or enlarge an item horizontally, vertically, or equally in both directions. When you scale an item, all of the embroidery properties are preserved. After the scaling modifications are complete, the stitches are re-generated according to the new outline that you have created. Remember that you can use the Scale tab at the project, design, or element level (element level editing is only available in the DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

75 Editing Properties 61 DesignShop and higher product levels). You can scale multiple elements at the same time. You can also scale elements manually in the View Window. (See Scaling, pg. 102). Proportional: By having this option on (with a check mark in the box), you are sure to scale the design equally both the horizontally and vertically. If you would like to only scale horizontally or only scale vertically, you can turn this option off by clicking on the Proportional box (which will remove the check mark). Horizontal: This is where you can specify an exact percentage or measurement to scale horizontally. Vertical: This is where you can specify an exact percentage or measurement to scale vertically. Expanded Stitch Processor (only available in expanded designs) DesignShop contains an expanded stitch processor that is invoked when scaling an expanded design. To keep the density and stitch length constant, the stitch processor will automatically increase or decrease the design stitch count when the design is scaled up or down. The Expanded Stitch Processor is always enabled when graphically scaling an expanded design. To scale an expanded design without stitch processing, follow the steps listed below: 1. Un-check the Expanded Stitch Processing setting on the Scale tab. 2. Enter the desired scale factors. 3. Click on Apply or OK. When you want to scale an expanded design with stitch processing, you can also change column/satin density, fill density, and column width. To do this, click the Stitch Processing tab Rev. A Editing

76 62 Editing Properties Column/Satin Density and Fill Density - In these text boxes you can enter percentages to increase or decrease Column/Satin Density and/or Fill Density (for example, to increase Fill Density by 20%, enter 120 in the Fill Density text box). Adjust Column Width - To turn on column width adjustment, check the box next to Adjust Column Width. This setting allows you to adjust the width of all columns when this setting is applied. The width can be adjusted by percentages (up to 25%) or by points (up to 20 points; entering points will add or take away points in the column). You can increase or decrease (enter negative values to decrease) column width along the X axis (horizontal stitch direction) and along the Y axis (vertical stitch direction). The default values for all of the settings is zero, which means the column width is not adjusted. If you click the Save button, any changes to the column width adjustment setting will be saved in this tab (that is, when you open this tab again, the settings will reflect your changes). After making any changes to these settings, click OK to apply these changes and close the dialog. (Click Apply to apply the changes without closing the dialog). Status Tab When you access the properties of a project, design, or element, you will also see the Status tab in the properties dialog (see the following image). DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

77 Editing Properties 63 The Status tab allows you to quickly review the statistics of the selected element, design, or project. This tab is not editable. Size: This shows the status of the element in inches and points. The measurement below the X is the horizontal measurement of the element. The measurement below the Y is the vertical measurement of the element. Distance From Origin: Minimum: The minimum measurement below the X displays the most minimum point of an element in relation to the X axis. The minimum measurement below the Y displays the minimum point of an element in relation to the Y axis. Maximum: The maximum measurement below the X displays the maximum point of an element in relation to the X axis. The maximum measurement below the Y displays the maximum point of an element in relation to the Y axis. End: The end measurement that is below the X displays the distance of the last stitch point in relation to the X axis. The end measurement below the Y displays the distance of the last stitch point in relation to the Y axis. If you right-click on a design file in Windows Explorer, and select Properties from the popup menu, one of the tabs you will see will be the Status tab. This allows you to view the Status tab outside of Design- Shop. Stitches: By Color: This gives you a list of how many colors and the total stitch count per color Rev. A Editing

78 64 Editing Properties Longest: This gives you the longest stitch of the element, design, or project. Shortest: This gives you the shortest stitch of the element, design, or project. Total: This gives you the total stitch count of the element, design, or project. AMAYA Machine Settings Tab DesignShop provides an AMAYA Machine Settings tab. This will allow you to save AMAYA machine settings with a design. When you open the design in AMAYA OS, it will open with the settings saved with it in DesignShop. Material thickness: This number represents the thickness of the material you are sewing on. The thicker the material, the higher this number should be. The default for this setting is 3, but you may need to adjust this setting depending on the thickness of your fabric. Column Feed: This setting determines how much thread the AMAYA feeds when sewing column stitches. The number in this field DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

79 Editing Properties 65 represents the percentage of the column that is showing bobbin (this is represented visually by the white line in the image to the right of the number). Use the up and down arrows to adjust column thread feed. To increase the thread feed for columns, you need to decrease the column feed. The default for this setting is 50. Run/Fill Feed: This setting determines how much thread the AMAYA feeds when sewing run and fill stitches. To increase the thread feed for run and fill stitches, you need to increase the run/fill feed. The default for this setting is 100. Maximum Speed: This is the maximum machine sewing speed. Applique Layer Thickness: This number represents the thickness of any layers you insert in a color sequence. In the example shown in the image above, the layer thickness is 6 pts. (this is the default value). This means that when the machine encounters an inserted layer, it will act as if the material thickness is 6 pts. and increase thread feed to compensate for that thickness. Tail Length: This parameter (choices are short, medium, and long) refer to the length of thread tail left after a trim. The default is medium tail. Trim Type: The AMAYA can be set to trim differently for metallic thread than other threads. When sewing with metallic thread, this parameter should be set to metallic; otherwise it should be set to normal. Settings by Color: When this box is checked, you can adjust the machine settings for each color. In the box where the color sequence colors are shown, click on the box of the color number you want to use to change machine settings. Machine settings will only change for the stitches sewn in that color number. Repeat this process for any color. Please note that if Settings by Color is turned off (box is not checked) when you click OK or Apply in this tab, any settings by color will be removed from the current design. Thread Types: You can also apply settings to a color number based on thread type. (For example, the first color in your color sequence may be sewn with metallic thread.) In the thread type area at the bottom of the dialog box, you will see a list of pre-defined thread Rev. A Editing

80 66 Editing Properties types (Rayon, Polyester, Cotton, and Metallic). Each of these thread types provides pre-defined settings for the parameters available on the AMAYA Machine Settings tab (i.e., speed, column feed, material thickness, etc.). Note that Thread Types are only available if Settings by Color is turned on. To use these thread types, click the box of the color number you want to change, then click the thread type you wish to use, then click the Apply Thread button. The machine settings for the color number you selected will be changed to the pre-defined settings for the thread type you selected. IMPORTANT: Please note that these thread type settings are only meant to be used as guidelines. You may need to adjust these settings, depending on the fabric type, design being sewn, etc. After you apply the thread settings to a color number, you can adjust them in the settings area of this tab (this will not change the stored predefined settings). Element Properties Elements within DesignShop are categorized into the following types: columns, fills, and walk stitches. This section describes how to edit the properties of these various element types. Walk Stitch Properties When you access the properties of a walk stitch, or a project or design that contains walk stitch elements, you will see the Walk Stitch tab in the properties dialog (see the following image). DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

81 Editing Properties 67 Stitch Type: The three stitch types that you have to choose from are Normal, Bean, and Decorative. Walk Normal Stitch: This is a normal walk stitch with automatic needle penetrations between each element input point. Walk Bean Stitch: Where a normal stitch lays one length of thread down for each stitch, a bean stitch lays down three lengths of thread. When choosing Bean stitch you have the option to change the thickness of the stitch. Walk Decorative Stitch: From within the Walk Stitch Properties you can select Decorative Stitch under Stitch Type. (Available in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro + only). You can then select which saved stitch you would like to use by left-clicking the drop-down arrow next to Stitch. You can also click the Stitch View/ Select button to see a graphical version. For tutorials on changing walk stitch properties, see pg Rev. A Editing

82 68 Editing Properties See pg. 163 for information on the standard decorative stitches and creating new decorative stitches. For tutorials on digitizing walk stitches, see pg. 301 and pg Retrace: When you digitize a walk stitch and have the retrace on, the walk stitch will be stitched out twice, the second walk stitch on top of the first walk stitch. (The stitch will return to the first wireframe point). This is useful in making a single walk stitch appear thicker. To turn this function on, left-click in the box next to Retrace. A check mark will appear to symbolize that this function is on. Click again to remove the check mark, which symbolizes that this function is off. Offset: This setting (determined by points) allows the retrace stitches to be offset from the walk stitches. This prevents the retrace stitches from being placed in the same holes as the walk stitches. When used, the Offset distance should be set at 2 or 3 points. You can enter negative values to have the retrace stitched to the left of the walk stitch. Stitch Length: A stitch is created each time the needle comes down. The stitch length setting determines the length of these stitches. As the stitch length value increases, the number of stitches decreases. Typical stitch length values for underlay stitches are between 30 and DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

83 Editing Properties points. Typical stitch length values for outline and detail stitches are between 15 and 25 points. Curve Compensation: When this option is turned on, DesignShop will automatically decrease the stitch length of walk stitches on tight curves. This is only available in the DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro + product levels. Column Properties When you access the properties of a column, or a project or design that contains column elements, you will see the Column tab in the properties dialog (see the following image). You can edit column properties at the project, design, and element level (element level editing is only available in the DesignShop and higher product levels). Stitch Type: You have the option of choosing from four different stitch types: Satin, Fill, E Stitch, and Zigzag. See the following image to see what these different stitches look like. For tutorials on changing column properties, see pg Rev. A Editing

84 70 Editing Properties When choosing a Fill type of column, besides the standard column properties, you also have the options to enter the stitch length, the number of partitions, and the partition sequence. Refer to the Fill Tab section, pg. 76, where you can find information on these parameters. A good reason for changing your column type to fill is in the instance where your columns are too wide for a standard satin type of stitch. The fill stitch type is also useful in creating a split satin effect. This effect is particularly useful with large lettering. To create this effect, first measure the stitch length of your column (from a point on one side to a point on the other side), then right-click the column and select Properties from the popup menu. Change the stitch type to Fill, enter 1 for the Partition #, divide your stitch length measurement in half, and enter this is in the Stitch Length setting. After these changes are applied, the column will contain needle penetrations down the center. NOTE: You cannot use pattern fills on columns. Width: You can change column width by percentage. The default setting for column width is 100%, which can also be referred to as actual size. To make columns bigger, choose a percentage over 100%. To make columns smaller, choose a percentage below 100%. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

85 Editing Properties 71 Density: Density refers to the space between each line of stitching. When this space is decreased, the lines of stitching per inch increases. To create more lines of stitching per inch, decrease the density value. A general rule of thumb is: As design size increases, density value should decrease. As design size decreases, density value should increase. The default density setting is 4 points. Refer to the following density conversion chart for further information: Overlap: When the exit point of a column is not in the corner of a Rev. A Editing

86 72 Editing Properties column, the column is sewn in sections. The overlap parameter determines how much (the number of stitch lines) these sections will overlap. Auto-Density: Many columns are not going to be straight from beginning to end. The width may increase, decrease, and increase again. In this situation it is very useful to use the Auto-Density option, instead of having to manually insert density changes throughout your stitchlist. Auto density will determine the density changes for you. To implement the Auto-Density function, left-click in the box. Click again to remove the check mark (this turns Auto- Density off). Below is an example of Auto-Density turned on. Custom Auto-Density: DesignShop allows you to enter the values used by the auto-density function. To customize auto-density, leftclick beside the Auto-Density On checkbox. You will see the following window: DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

87 Editing Properties 73 This dialog allows you to enter a custom density for a range of column widths (you can type the values or click the up/down arrows to increase/decrease the values). In the image above, notice that the density for columns that are 10 points wide have a density of 6.0, and the density for columns that are 20 points wide have a density of 5.0. This means that as column widths change within the range of 10 to 20 points, the density will change in the range of 6.0 to 5.0 (i.e, when column width is 15 points, density will be 5.5). The values displayed in the above image are the default values. If you make changes to these values, then decide you want to return to the default values, click the Defaults button. Click the OK button to apply your changes. Short Stitches: When digitizing columns, particularly letters or numbers, stitches will build up on the inside of a sharp arc or turn in the design. This build-up often causes thread breaks because stitches begin to fall on top of each other at the same location. Even if thread breaks don't occur, the look of the stitching may not be ideal. Using the short stitch option prevents this build-up by inserting shorter stitches throughout the curve or turn making it a much smoother transition. The software determines where short stitches should be Rev. A Editing

88 74 Editing Properties inserted based on the relative length of the sides of a column segment, their length as a percentage of the actual distance across the column, and how many will be generated between any two normal length stitches, as shown in the following example. Short Stitches On The default setting is for short stitches to be On because short stitches will only be generated where the software determines short stitches will be needed to prevent stitches on top of stitches. If you would like to turn short stitches Off, left-click in the box next to the short stitches option. To change the length of short stitches, click the button. This will open the following dialog: To shorten short stitches, enter a percentage less than 100. To lengthen short stitches, enter a number greater than 100. Click OK after entering a change. Interior Entry/Exit Pts. On: When this setting is turned on (box is DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

89 Editing Properties 75 checked), and the entry/exit points are placed inside the wireframe edges of the element, sewing will start at the exact location of the entry point and will finish at the exact location of the exit point. When this setting is turned off (box is not checked), entry/exit points can still be placed within the element. However, the actual start and finish points will be calculated to the points along the wireframe edge that is nearest to the placement of the entry/exit points. Underlay: Underlay is used to help keep the material from stretching or distorting during the top stitching process and to hold the stitches out of the nap of the fabric. The Primary Underlay is the first underlay that will stitch out. Secondary Underlay may be selected as well if you would like two types of underlay. There are three types of underlay: Center Walk Underlay: is a walk stitch down the middle of the column. After selecting a center walk underlay, you have the option to change the stitch length. The default stitch length is set at 30 points. Edge Walk Underlay: is a walk stitch that runs along the edge of the column. After selecting an edge walk underlay, you have the option to change the stitch length and the percentage of the column width where you would like the edge walk to appear. The default stitch length is set at 30 points. The default width percentage is set at 70%. Zigzag Underlay: is a walk stitch that zigzags from left to right down the length of the column. After selecting a zigzag underlay, you have the option to change the stitch length and percentage of the column width where you would like the underlay to appear. The default stitch length is set at 15 points. The default width percentage is set at 70%. Double Zigzag Underlay: is two walk stitches that zigzag from left to right down the length of the column and cross each other. After selecting a zigzag underlay, you have the option to change the stitch length and percentage of the column width where you would like the underlay to appear. The default stitch length is set at 15 points. The default width percentage is set at 70%. Underlay is available for Satin, Fill, and Zigzag type columns Rev. A Editing

90 76 Editing Properties Effects: CIick this button to access column effects such as capped corners. See pg. 175 for detailed information on column effects. NOTE: Column effects are only available in the DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro + product levels. Singleline Tab: Singleline columns have an additional properties tab. (See image below). Width: This gives you the option of changing the width measurement for Singleline center, Singleline left, and Singleline right. You can also change the position of the stitch area surrounding the column line by selecting Center line, left of line, or right of line. Custom: When you select the Custom radio button, a scroll bar will appear. This scroll bar allows you to position a singleline column to the left and right of the center line by percentages. For example, if you drag the scroll bar to 60% left, 40% right, 60% of the stitch area will be to the left of the centerline, and 40% of the stitch area will be to the right of the centerline. Fill Properties When you access the properties of a complex fill, or a project or DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

91 Editing Properties 77 design that contains complex fill elements, you will see the Fill tab in the properties dialog. Standard Fills There are 16 pre-defined fills containing from 1 to 8 partitions in various combinations of fill parameters. You can change the standard fill type for existing complex fills. The different parameters for the pre-defined standard fills are as follows: Rev. A Editing

92 78 Editing Properties Load Standard Fill: By clicking the down arrow below Standard, you can select the desired fill by name. Fill View/Select: By clicking this you will get a graphical list of all of the saved standard fills. From here you can click and select the desired fill then click OK. This DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

93 Editing Properties 79 is very useful to visualize how the fill will stitch out. Effects: Clicking this button opens the Fill Effects dialog. Fill effects are described in detail on pg (Fill effects are only available for the DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro + product levels). Density: Here you can enter the number of embroidery points there are between rows of stitches (example: 4.2 points). Stitch length: Here you can enter the maximum length between needle penetrations. Number of Partitions, Partition Sequence, Line Angle: These parameters are described in detail on pg. 185, Creating Standard Fills. Overlap: This setting allows you to adjust how much (number of stitch lines) fill regions overlap. Trapunto: Available only in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro +. Trapunto will allow you to move the travel stitches of a complex fill to the side of the element, instead of through the middle. This will prevent the travel stitches from being conspicuous on larger space values or higher density fills. Click to insert a check mark in the box next to Trapunto to apply this type of underlay, click in the box again to remove trapunto. You have the option to apply trapunto or underlay, not both. Below is an example of a complex fill with trapunto applied. For tutorials on changing fill properties, see pg When you turn on Trapunto, you are given the option to turn on Trace Border. This will stitch a border around the fill Rev. A Editing

94 80 Editing Properties Minimum Stitch Length: This setting is the minimum length between needle penetrations. The default value for this setting is 8 points. This setting is particularly useful for controlling the length of stitches at the edge of an element. Interior Entry/Exit Pts. On: When this setting is turned on (box is checked), and the entry/exit points are placed inside the wireframe edges of the element, sewing will start at the exact location of the entry point and will finish at the exact location of the exit point. When this setting is turned off (box is not checked), entry/exit points can still be placed within the element. However, the actual start and finish points will be calculated to the points along the wireframe edge that is nearest to the placement of the entry/exit points. Pull Compensation: The primary use of this feature is to compensate for stitch pull. When the pull compensation value for a given complex fill is changed, all adjustments will be made with respect to each individual stitch line length and direction. For example, if the pull compensation is set to 103% for a given complex fill, each individual stitch line will be increased in length by 3% with respect to its current stitch direction. To visualize how the stitches compensate in the direction of your stitch direction, grab an end of your stitch direction line and rotate it to another position; view the example below: DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

95 Editing Properties 81 The reason for using pull compensation has to do with the way stitches pull on different types of fabric. For example, you may have a circle type of fill with an outline; sewing this on certain fabrics may cause the circle to pull inward after being sewn on the fabric and not be the perfect circle that it was digitized as. Also, the outline may not exactly line up with the circle as it should. Using the pull compensation feature can correct a situation like this. Like many things in embroidery, knowing which values are best for the different types of fabric will take practice. You can move the slider bar using your mouse; click and drag the rectangle to the right side for positive pull compensation and to the left for negative pull compensation. You can also use the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard to change the percentage value. Primary Underlay: You have the options of turning on primary underlay and applying it to a fill. Left-click to insert a check mark in the box next to Primary Underlay to apply underlay; click in the box again to un-apply underlay. You can adjust the following settings for primary underlay: If you want to remove the pull compensation from the fill, simply move the slider bar back to the (100%) position Rev. A Editing

96 82 Editing Properties Stitch Length - The maximum stitch length between underlay needle penetrations Border Margin - The area between the edge of the underlay and the edge of the fill. Density - The number of embroidery points there are between rows of stitches in the underlay. Angle - The angle of the underlay is in relation to the stitch direction of the fill. For example, a 90 degree angle underlay will be sewn perpendicular to the stitches of the fill. Secondary Underlay: You can also add a secondary underlay to a fill. Left-click to insert a check mark in the box next to Secondary Underlay to apply underlay; click in the box again to un-apply underlay. The secondary underlay settings are the same as primary underlay settings. Save Fill: You can create your own standard fills by selecting different combinations of parameters. (See Creating Standard Fills, pg. 185, for more information). Save As Default: Any time that you change a setting or settings and click the Save As Default button your changes will be saved. Even if you close DesignShop and re-open it, your default settings will be saved. Pattern Fills (Available in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro + only) Pattern Fill is a custom stitch type used in complex fills. It is used for large areas to obtain artistic effects in designs. The fill stitching in a pattern fill is a satin stitch with needle penetrations forming the chosen pattern. You can choose from several of the standard pattern fills included with DesignShop or you can create your own using Create Pattern Fill. (See Creating Pattern Fills, pg. 189, for more information). Pattern fills are saved in a custom file named CustomFactory.cff. If you have upgraded an existing DesignShop system to DesignShop 2004, you will need to complete the following steps to insert the new DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

97 Editing Properties 83 custom file and access the new standard pattern fills. 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Select File->New. 3. Select Custom->Insert Custom File. 4. Navigate to the DesignShop installation directory (the default is C:\Program Files\Melco Embroidery Systems\Design Shop) 5. Select the file CustomFactory2004.cff. 6. Click OK. You will now be able to access the new pattern fills. The following standard pattern fills are available with DesignShop. Macaroni Bricks Diamond Caret Diamond Curve Weave Diamond Simple Diamond Straight Weave Raindrops Stars Vertical Scales Waffle Weave Rev. A Editing

98 84 Editing Properties Load Pattern Fill: By clicking the down arrow below Pattern, you can select the desired fill by name. Fill View/Select: By clicking this you will get a graphical list of all of the saved pattern fills. Effects: Clicking this button opens the Fill Effects dialog. Fill effects are described in detail on pg Density: Here you can enter the number of embroidery points there are between rows of stitches (example: 4.2 points). Stitch length: Here you can enter the maximum length between needle penetrations. Pattern Width: You can change the width of the pattern in this parameter. The original pattern width is displayed in the Created Width parameter. Pattern Height: You can change the height of the pattern in this parameter. The original pattern height is displayed in the Created Height parameter. Trapunto: Available only in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro +. This property works as it does in standard fills. See Trapunto, pg. 81, for more information. Primary and Secondary Underlay: This property works as it does in standard fills. See Underlay, pg. 81, for more information. Minimum Stitch Length: This setting is the minimum length DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

99 Editing Properties 85 between needle penetrations. The default value for this setting is 8 points. This setting is particularly useful for controlling the length of stitches at the edge of an element. Interior Entry/Exit Pts. On: This setting works as it does in standard fills. See Interior Entry/Exit Pts., pg. 85, for more information. Pull Compensation: This property works as it does in partition fills. See Pull Compensation, pg. 79, for more information. Satin Stitch Fills (Available in DesignShop, DesignShop Pro, DesignShop Pro +) You can also use a satin stitch in complex fills. It is recommended that a satin stitch is used with fills with narrow widths. It can be used in wider fills, but wide satin stitches can snag easily and may not cover the fabric well. Effects: Clicking this button opens the Fill Effects dialog. Fill effects are described in detail on pg Density: Here you can enter the number of embroidery points there are between rows of stitches (example: 4.2 points). Overlap: This setting allows you to adjust how much (number of stitch lines) fill regions overlap Rev. A Editing

100 86 Editing Properties Trapunto: Available only in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro +. See pg. 79. Minimum Stitch Length: This setting is the minimum length between needle penetrations. The default value for this setting is 8 points. This setting is particularly useful for controlling the length of stitches at the edge of an element. Interior Entry/Exit Pts. On: This setting works as it does in standard fills. See Interior Entry/Exit Pts., pg. 85, for more information. Pull Compensation: See pg. 80. Primary/Secondary Underlay: See pg. 81. Decorative Stitch Fills (Available in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro + only) You can also create fills with decorative stitches. A decorative stitch fill completes a fill with lines of decorative stitching, using the decorative stitch types stored with DesignShop. Decorative stitches are saved in a custom file named CustomFactory.cff. If you have upgraded an existing DesignShop system to DesignShop 2004, you will need to complete the following steps to insert the new custom file and access the new standard decorative stitches. 1. Open DesignShop, then select File->New. 2. Select Custom->Insert Custom File. 3. Navigate to the DesignShop installation directory (the default is C:\Program Files\Melco Embroidery Systems\Design Shop) 4. Select the file CustomFactory2004.cff, then click OK. You will now be able to access the new decorative stitches. The following decorative stitches are available: DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

101 Editing Properties 87 Bead Box (small) Holiday Star Tack Head Bows Bows in Satin Diamond Fan Ha Ha (Gothic Script) Ha Ha (Melco Script) Ha Ha (St. Louis Script) Just Squares Kiss Me Leaves Snowflakce Spin Star Trees You can choose from the decorative stitches included with DesignShop, or you can create your own using Create Decorative Stitch. (See Creating Decorative Stitches, pg. 163, for more information). Load Decorative Fill: By clicking the down arrow below Decorative, you can select the desired fill by name. Fill View/Select: Clicking this will display a graphical list of all of the saved decorative stitches Rev. A Editing

102 88 Editing Properties Effects: Clicking this button opens the Fill Effects dialog. Fill effects are described in detail on pg Density: Here you can enter the number of embroidery points there are between rows of stitches (example: 4.2 points). Stitch length: Here you can enter the maximum length between needle penetrations. Number of Partitions, Partition Sequence, Line Angle: These settings in decorative stitches work similarly to those in standard fills. The main difference is that the partitions in decorative stitches are based on decorative stitch objects (e.g., a star) instead of stitch points. See Creating Standard Fills, pg. 185, for a description of these settings. Minimum Stitch Length: This setting is the minimum length between needle penetrations. The default value for this setting is 8 points. This setting is particularly useful for controlling the length of stitches at the edge of an element. Interior Entry/Exit Pts. On: This setting works as it does in standard fills. See Interior Entry/Exit Pts., pg. 85, for more information. Pull Compensation: See Pull Compensation, pg. 80. Trace Border: Left-click in this checkbox to trace a border around the decorative stitch fill. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

103 Editing Properties 89 Width/Height: You can change these percentages to resize a decorative stitch. Color Properties In Chapter Two, you were introduced to the DesignShop Color Palette, pg. 16. This section provides information on how you can change the properties of the Color Palette. To access Color Properties, right-click any color in the color palette and select Properties from the pop-up menu (you can do this from the Color Palette toolbar or from the Palette tab in the Project View). The three tabs for changing color properties are the Select tab, the Options tab and the Graphic Background tab. (See Changing the Graphic Background, pg. 39, for more information on this topic). The image below displays the Select tab. Color Chart: The Select tab lets you choose colors from three different color charts included with DesignShop. The three different color charts to choose from are System RGB Colors, ARC Poly Embroidery Thread, and ARC Rayon Embroidery Thread. To select the Rev. A Editing

104 90 Editing Properties different charts, click on the down arrow and make your selection. If you have other color charts already installed on your computer (color charts have a file extension of.tch), you may copy these files through Windows Explorer and paste them into the DesignShop\ Color Data Directory. These files can now be viewed directly in DesignShop via the Color Chart list box. Color: Once you are in the Color Properties dialog, you can change all of the colors in your design. The box next to Color: displays the number of the color on the palette that you are currently changing. You can use the up and down arrows to move to the desired color on the palette. This is very useful because it allows you to change all of the colors at one time instead of having to double-click on each one to change them. The current color is displayed in the color box below. The name of the currently applied color and its graphical representation display on the top half of the box. If you choose another color, it will be displayed on the bottom of the color box (until applied, then it is the current choice on top). The Color Properties dialog on the previous page shows 640 ARC Rayon as the applied (current color) and 345 ARC Poly as the new color (recent color that has been clicked on). If you click Apply, 345 ARC Poly will be the current color and displayed on top. When you choose a different Color Chart than the current one, the Color Selection will automatically scroll to the closest match color (this is determined by the RGB value of the color). This closest match color will display on the bottom. You can choose to apply it or scroll through the Color Selection to another color. Color Selection: On the right side of the color properties dialog you can choose from a list of colors. The system RGB colors are like that of other color property dialogs in graphics programs and work the same way. The ARC Poly and ARC Rayon embroidery thread menus display the colors of embroidery threads that are available. This is very useful if you would like to match your colors in DesignShop with the actual thread colors. The color code numbers are listed below the color. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

105 Editing Properties 91 Click to the right of the color list bar to get close to the desired color, then use the scroll bar to move through the zoomed version to get the exact color. Replacement Box: The top half of the color box (on the left of the color property dialog) displays what color is currently applied to the particular color in the color palette. The bottom half displays the new selection. Find Number: This is very useful if you have the code from the spool of thread and you would like to apply the exact color to your design. Simply enter the code and once it is highlighted in the zoomed version of the color list (it will have a blue box around it), click on the color in the color list. For most color charts, you can also do a find (search) by name of thread. Match Chart: If you would like to apply a different color thread chart than the current one, you can select a different color chart, click on Match Chart, and all of the colors in your color palette will be updated to the new color chart. Order Thread: If you are connected to the Internet, this link will take you directly to everythingembroidery.com where you can order threads online. The link goes directly to the everythingembroidery.com store. Once you are in the online store, look to the left of the screen where you will find a link to the section for ordering thread. Save As Custom: Using Save As Custom, you can create custom color charts and custom color palettes. Custom Color Chart: You may want to create a Custom Color (thread) Chart that contain certain thread colors. Custom Color Charts may consist of thread colors from multiple Color Charts (e.g., colors from both ARC Poly and ARC Rayon). Match Chart is a great tool to match the color palette colors to your Custom Color Chart Rev. A Editing

106 92 Editing Properties Creating a Custom Color Chart is a great way for you to save a color chart consisting of the threads you personally have on hand (in stock). To save a Custom Color Chart, right-click on the color palette, then click the Select tab. 1. Choose your colors by clicking on the desired color chart (from the drop-down list of color charts). 2. Select the color (this is the number next to Color:, for instance start with color 1). 3. Choose a color from the color selections in the chart. 4. Click Apply. 5. Move on to the next color (number next to Color:, for instance next would be number 2). 6. At this point you may also change the Color Chart for different color selections. 7. After you have selected all of your desired colors, click on the Save As Custom button. 8. Type in a desired name, select the number of colors for your palette, make sure that Color Chart has a black circle in the button to the left of it. 9. Click OK. Custom Color Palette: You may want to create Custom Color Palettes. For example, you may have different custom color palettes that you use for particular designs. When saving a Custom Color Palette you can just right click on the color palette, select Load Custom Palette, choose your desired palette, and click OK. To save a Custom Color Palette, follow the same steps as you would for saving a Custom Color Chart (described above), with the exception of step number 8. In step 8, make sure that Palette (not Color Chart) has a black circle in the button to the left of it. The Options Tab gives you several options to change that directly affect Color Properties. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

107 Editing Properties 93 Color Wrap: Here you can select how many colors you would like to have in a color wrap. The way that a color wrap works, is that for example you have two colors in a wrap. As you are digitizing you insert a color change; this will bring you to the second color. When you insert another color change you will be back at the first color. In other words you will go through the colors to the last one and then wrap around to the beginning color. This option also has a Save As Default button. Window Settings: If you do not want to have the background color button shown on the color palette, click in the box next to Show background color button. This will remove the check mark from the box and hides the button. The same applies to the Walk Through Colors button. Left Button Click: The default setting for this is to have the left mouse button click over a color toggle you through hide/show of colors. You can change this to Displays color selection, which will bring you directly into the color properties. Select Settings: When you are in the color properties and you are selecting the colors for your color palette, you can select the desired color for number 1, click Apply, select the desired color for number 2, click Apply, and so on Rev. A Editing

108 94 Editing Points Editing Points (Available in DesignShop and higher product levels) There are two types of points you can edit in DesignShop. You can edit wireframe points in elements that contain this type of point. You can also edit stitch points in both expanded and wireframe elements. This section provides information on working with these two types of points. Note that you can change the size of points in the View Window by selecting Tools->Options, then clicking the Editing Properties tab. In this tab you can select the desired point size. Adding and Editing Wireframe Points Click the left mouse button to add straight points and click the right mouse button to add curved points. Straight points appear as small triangles, while curved points appear as small circles. To edit wireframe points, you must select them first. You can select them from the Project View Tree by left-clicking them. (You can select multiple points in the Project Tree View by pressing and holding the CTRL key, then left-clicking the points you wish to select). You can also press and hold the SHIFT key to select a range of wireframe points. When you place your cursor over wireframe points in the View Window, you will see a over straight points and a over curved points. When one of these cursors is visible you can left-click to select the point. You can select a group of points in a selected element in the View Window by pressing the SHIFT key, leftclicking and holding down the mouse button, and dragging a box around the desired group of points. The Custom Selection toolbar button can be used to select a group of points more precisely. To do this, select an element, then click the Custom Selection toolbar button. Using the custom selection cursor, within the selected element, left-click as many times as necessary to outline the points you wish to select (you can also DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

109 Editing Points 95 left-click, then drag the mouse to outline the points). Press ENTER or the middle mouse button. You can then move the points you have selected. Once a point (or a group of points) is selected, you can drag (hold down the left mouse button) and drop it (release the left mouse button) to the desired location. The stitches will be updated automatically to reflect the change. (You can delete a point once it is selected by pressing the DELETE key on your keyboard.) You can also edit entry and exit points for all elements (walk stitches, columns, and fills). Entry points are represented by and exit points are represented by. You can move these entry and exit points by left-clicking them, then dragging and dropping them. You can also edit the stitch direction points of complex fills. These stitch direction points are represented by diamonds (see image below). You can move stitch direction points (which changes the stitch direction) by left-clicking a stitch direction point to select it, then dragging and dropping it. Once a point is selected (in the Project Tree View or the View Window) you can right-click on it to view its properties (available in DesignShop and higher product levels). (You can also double-click a point in either location to view its properties) Rev. A Editing

110 96 Editing Points Straight/Curve: You can change the type of point to Straight or Curve by selecting the radio button for that type. Position: You can change the position of the point by typing new locations in the X and Y text boxes. You also have the option of adding digitizing points to an element outline. Move the cursor along the outline to get this cursor. Then simply left-click to insert a straight point and right-click to insert a curved point. Editing Stitch Points You can perform stitch editing in both expanded and wireframe elements. Stitch Editing in Expanded Elements To view a list of the stitch points in expanded elements, click on the Stitches tab in the Project View. This tab will show you all of the stitch points in a project. (See pg. 15 for detailed information on the Stitches tab). To perform stitch point editing, first click the Stitch Editing button (next to the Edit Mode button). When you move the cursor over the design, the mouse cursor will change. This cursor indicates that the mouse is over a point. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

111 Editing Points 97 When you see this cursor, you can left-click the point and drag it to the desired location. You can select points from the stitch list in the Stitches tab by leftclicking. When you have a point selected, this is indicated by the following graphic in the View Window. When a point is selected, you can right-click the point, then select Properties from the popup menu. In the dialog that appears, you can change the type of stitch from normal to jump stitch (or vice versa). You can select multiple points in the Stitch List by left-clicking a point, pressing the CTRL key on your keypad, and left-clicking the other points you want to select. You can also press and hold the SHIFT key to select a range of stitch points. You can select a group of points in a selected element in the View Window by pressing the SHIFT key, left-clicking and holding down the mouse button, and dragging a box around the desired group of points. The Custom Selection toolbar button can be used to select a group of points more precisely. To do this, select an element, then click the Custom Selection toolbar button. Using the custom selection cursor, within the selected element, left-click as many times as necessary to outline the points you wish to select (you can also left-click, then drag the mouse to outline the points). Press ENTER or the middle mouse button. You can then move the points you have selected. To perform single stitch point editing in a selected group of points, press CTRL + SHIFT, then draw a box around the desired group of points. The first point in this group will be selected, and you can navigate within this group of points to edit points individually. You can also delete and add stitch points. To delete a selected point, simply press the DELETE key on your keyboard. When you see this cursor in the View Window, you can left-click to add a normal stitch or right-click to add a jump stitch. To insert color changes and trims between stitches, select a stitch Rev. A Editing

112 98 Editing Points then click the appropriate toolbar button (color change or trim). Stitch Editing in Wireframe Elements To edit stitch points in wireframe elements, click the Stitch Editing button (next to the Edit Mode button). This will activate Stitch Editing Mode. Make sure the Stitches tab in the Project View area is active (click tab to make it active). You can now edit the stitch points. (The editing process is the same as for editing stitch points in expanded elements, see pg. 96). Please note that if you make a change in Stitch Editing Mode, then return to Wireframe Edit Mode (by clicking the Edit Mode button) and edit wireframe points, you will lose the changes you made in Stitch Editing Mode. Editing Tie In / Tie Off Stitches You can also edit tie in and tie off stitches. To do this they must first be turned on in the Lock Stitch / Trim tab (see pg. 54). Then, make sure Show Tie Ins/Tie Offs is turned on in the View tab (see pg. 53). This will make the tie ins/offs visible in the View Window. (These stitches are displayed in the Stitches tab as TI for Tie Ins and TO for Tie Offs). Click the Stitch Editing button (next to the Edit Mode button). This will activate Stitch Editing Mode, and you can now edit the tie in /off stitches. (The editing process is the same as for editing stitch points; see pg. 96 for instructions). Convert Expanded To Wireframe DesignShop will allow you to convert expanded data to wireframe data. You can do this at all levels: project, design, and element. There are three different methods for converting expanded data: through the View Window, the Project View, or the Edit Menu. You can convert one or more expanded elements at a time. This feature only applies to DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro + product levels. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

113 Editing Tools 99 Converting Expanded Data Through the View Window or Project View: 1. Right-click on the element, design, or project. 2. Select Convert Expanded To Wireframe from the pop-up menu. Converting Expanded Data Through the Edit Menu: 1. Select the element, design, or project through the View Window or project view 2. Select Edit->Convert Expanded To Wireframe. When converting expanded data to wireframe, it is a good idea to check the wireframe data. You may need to perform some minor editing on the elements. Editing Tools This section provides information on the editing tools available in DesignShop. Edit Mode Edit Mode allows you to edit elements in your project. When you are not in Edit Mode (e.g., you are digitizing), you can enter Edit Mode by clicking the black cursor that is in the input toolbar. You can also simply right-click any element. You can also click the ESC key on the keyboard to enter Edit Mode. Do not use the ESC method of entering Edit Mode if you are in the process of digitizing an element because the element will be removed. Selection Tools DesignShop provides multiple selection tools at all levels: project, design, element, and stitch point. Project Level The following list explains the available selection tools you can use to select an entire project. When the project is selected, a selection box will be displayed around the project in the View Window. Click the Select All toolbar button in the Main toolbar. For tutorials on DesignShop editing tools, see page pg Rev. A Editing

114 100 Editing Tools Select View->Select All. Right-click the project name in the Project View, then select Select All from the pop-up menu. Press CTRL + A on your keyboard. Left-click the project name in the Project View. NOTE: When you select a project from the Project View, a selection box does not appear in the View Window. Design Level The following list explains the available selection tools you can use to select an entire design. When the design is selected, a selection box will be displayed around the design in the View Window. In the View Window, left-click in an area outside of the design. (You may need to zoom out until you can see the entire design). Hold down the left mouse button, then drag the mouse to draw a box around the entire design. If you only have one design open in the project, you can click the Select All toolbar button in the Main toolbar or select View->Select All. You can also press CTRL + A on your keyboard. Right-click on the design name in the Project View, then select Select Entire Design from the pop-up menu. (Or left-click the design name in the Project View, then select View->Select Entire Design from the DesignShop menubar). Click the plus sign (+) to the left of the design name in the Project View to expand the design. Left-click on the first element in the design, press and hold the SHIFT button on your keyboard, then left-click the last element in the design (you may need to use the scroll bar). Left-click the design name in the Project View. NOTE: When you select a design from the Project View, a selection box does not appear in the View Window. Element Level The following list explains the available selection tools you can use to DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

115 Editing Tools 101 select elements. When an element is selected, a selection box will be displayed around the element in the View Window. NOTE: You can only select elements at this level in the DesignShop and higher product levels. Left-click the element in the View Window. Left-click the element name in the Project Tree View. To select multiple elements: Left-click an element in the View Window or the Project Tree View. Press the CTRL key on your keyboard, then left-click the elements you wish to add to the selection (while holding the CTRL key). Click an element in the Project Tree View, press and hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard, then left-click another element. The two elements you clicked and all elements between them will be selected. In the View Window, left-click in an area outside the design, hold down the left mouse button, then drag the mouse to draw a box around the elements you wish to select. If you wish to add any elements to the selection, move the cursor over the element (in the View Window or the Project Tree View) you want to add and press the CTRL key on your keyboard. You can also perform this procedure to remove elements from the selection. After selecting one or more elements, you can press CTRL + D to duplicate the selection. NOTE: See Editing Stitch Points, pg. 94, for more information on selecting stitch points. Previous and Next Element tools These toolbar buttons are very useful when you are having problems selecting elements in complex designs. They are available in the DesignShop and higher product levels. After opening a design, you may have multiple layers of stitches in the same area. An easy way to find elements under other elements without having to search through the stitch list would be to use the Previous and Next Element tools. Select a point that is digitized over another element, then click the Previous Element tool. You will Rev. A Editing

116 102 Editing Tools see the selected element move to the previous element in the stitch list. Performing Basic Functions (Available in all product levels) When items are selected, you can then perform basic functions such as Copy and Delete. See Basic Functions, pg. 28, for more information on using these functions. Moving (Available in all product levels) You can also move items once they are selected. When you have an item selected, whether it is an entire project, a design, or element you can move it around in the View Window. As mentioned previously, when an item is selected, a selection box is displayed around it. To move the selected item, move the cursor inside the selection. When you see this cursor, left-click, hold down the left mouse button, and move the item to the desired location. You can also move elements (and designs) in the Project View. This changes an element s location in the View Window and in the design (that is, it change the order in which the element will be sewn). To move an element in the Project View, left-click the element, hold down the left mouse button, then drag the element to the desired location. Scaling (Available in all product levels) There are two ways to perform scaling in DesignShop. First, you can scale items using the Scale tab in the Properties dialog. The fastest way to access this dialog is to double-click a selected project, design, or element. See Scale Tab, pg. 60, for a detailed description of how to use the Scale tab. You can also scale items in the View Window. When an item is selected, you will see an eight-handled box around it. (See image below). DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

117 Editing Tools 103 To scale the design proportionally, left-click and drag any of the four corner handles. To scale the design in the X or Y position only, left-click and drag the black handles in between the corners. NOTE: You can use selection tools ( pg. 99) to scale multiple or all elements. Rotating in the View Window (Available in all product levels) Designs, lettering objects, and elements can be easily rotated in the View Window. (If you have DesignShop Pro or DesignShop Pro +, you can also rotate graphics in the View Window). To do this, first select the item you wish to rotate. RIght-click on the selected item and select Rotate from the pop-up menu. (You can also left-click the selected item). You will now have a box around your item that looks like this: Rev. A Editing

118 104 Editing Tools pivot point When in this mode, you can also slant the selected item. To do this, left-click the selected item. Then left-click and drag any handle (except for corner handles) to slant the item. To rotate the item, you will use the pivot point that comes from the middle of the item. You can click and drag the pivot point to have the center of rotation anywhere that you would like. Once you have determined the center of rotation, hold the mouse cursor over a corner of the box; you will see the following cursor. Left-click, then drag the cursor to rotate the item. When you are manipulating an item, all of the stitch information will be automatically filled in to fit the new shape of the item. You can also rotate using the Position Tab (see pg. 59). NOTE: You can use selection tools, pg. 99, to rotate multiple or all elements. Mirroring (Available in all product levels) These tools allow you to quickly mirror an element or a whole design. Simply, select an element, multiple elements, design(s), or an entire project, then click the horizontal or vertical toolbar button. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

119 Editing Tools 105 Below are examples of vertical and horizontal mirroring: Original Vertical Mirroring Original Horizontal Mirroring Grouping Ungrouping (Available in DesignShop, DesignShop Pro, DesignShop Pro +) When elements are grouped, they act as one element rather than separate elements. You can access grouping or ungrouping through the View menu or by clicking the toolbar buttons. After selecting more than one element, you can group them by simply clicking the Group button. After you do this, a number is automatically assigned to that group. You can view this number in the Project View. If you click on any of the items within the group, the whole group will be selected. The only exception to this is if you click in the View Rev. A Editing

120 106 Editing Tools Window and drag a box around part of the design to select elements, then the whole group may not be selected. The reason for this exception is so that you can still have temporary grouping without having to ungroup your numbered groups. The Group Button also has a drop-down arrow for easy selection. If you click on this arrow you can select the number of the group, and the whole group will be selected in the Project View and the View Window. To ungroup a group, select an element from that group and click on the Ungroup button. This will remove all of the currently selected elements from their group. Aligning There are two ways to align your elements within your project. You can use Snap to Grid, which will align element(s) or design(s) in comparison with the grid, or you can use the Alignment Tools, which will align elements or designs in relation to each other. Snap to Grid (Available in all product levels) After pressing the Grid button, you can click the Alignment Tools button to quickly move a design or element to an exact location around the grid. You can have one or more elements or designs selected when using this feature. After selecting the Snap to Grid tab you will see the following dialog: DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

121 Editing Tools 107 Horizontal/Vertical: Select the axis you would like to move along (horizontal or vertical or perhaps both). Enter the value (in inches) of how far you want to move (keep at 0.00 if you want to be directly centered) in relation to the axis. Click on one of the radio buttons next to Center on, Top of, or Bottom of. Align Each Element in Group: Use this feature after you have a group of elements. (See Grouping/Ungrouping, pg. 105). To use this feature, select one element in the group, click on the Alignment Tools button, select the type of Snap to Grid you want, click to insert a check mark in the check box next to Align Each Element in Group. Alignment Tools (Available in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro + only) After selecting more than one element or design, click on the Alignment Tools button. You will then see the following dialog displaying the different ways that the elements or designs can be aligned. You may also use the tools that are on the Alignment toolbar to align the tools. Below is a short description of each type of alignment and the tool that can also be used to perform that function Rev. A Editing

122 108 Editing Tools Top Edge Alignment: This aligns your selected (or grouped) elements or designs to the top edge of the highest element or design. Bottom Edge Alignment: This aligns your selected (or grouped) elements or designs to the bottom edge of the lowest element or design. Left Edge Alignment: This aligns your selected (or grouped) elements or designs to the left edge of the very left element or design. Right Edge Alignment: This aligns your selected (or grouped) elements or designs to the right edge of the very right element or design. Center Horizontally: This finds the center point between all of the selected elements or designs and aligns them on an invisible horizontal line according to that center point. Note that this does not center them according to origin, use Snap to Grid for doing that. Center Vertically: This finds the center point between all of the selected elements or designs and aligns them on an invisible vertical line according to that center point. Note that this does not center DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

123 Editing Tools 109 them according to origin, use Snap to Grid for doing that. Spacing (Available in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro + only) Space Evenly Horizontally: This feature determines the distance between three or more elements or designs and spaces the horizontal distance between them evenly. You must have three or more elements or designs selected or grouped to use this feature. Space Evenly Vertically: This feature determines the distance between three or more elements or designs and spaces the vertical distance between them evenly. You must have three or more elements or designs selected or grouped to use this feature. Auto-Sequencing (Available in DesignShop Pro + only) Auto-sequencing can be used to optimize how a design is sewn. To use this tool, select an entire design or a group of elements. Rightclick, then select Minimize Jumps from the popup menu. The order of the selected elements will be changed if necessary (you can see this in the Project view) to minimize jumps between them. The locations of the entry and exits points may also be moved to minimize jumps. If you only want to change entry and exit points (and not sew order), select Auto Entry/Exit after right-clicking the selected elements. Locking (Available in DesignShop, DesignShop Pro, DesignShop Pro +) DesignShop provides a lock element tool. When an element is locked, you cannot perform any editing on that element. This means that you cannot select any of the digitized points of a locked element. Access to property pages of locked elements is also limited. You can only see the View and Status property pages of locked elements. The Status property page will indicate if any of your selections contain locked elements Rev. A Editing

124 110 Editing Tools To lock an element, left-click the element to select it (in the View Fill or Project Tree View), then click the Lock Element toolbar button When your mouse cursor is above a locked element, the Status Bar displays the following message: Pointer over locked element. (or select Edit->Lock Element). You can also right-click the element, then select Lock Element from the pop-up menu. When an element is locked, in the View Window you will see a lock cursor when you move the mouse over the element. In the Project View, you will see a lock icon next to the locked element. To unlock an element, select the locked element (in the View Fill or Project Tree View) and click the Lock Element toolbar button (or select Edit->Unlock Element). You can also right-click the element, then select Unlock Element from the pop-up menu. You can also perform this function when you have multiple elements selected. NOTE: You can only use the Lock Element toolbar button to unlock multiple elements when all of the selected elements are locked. For example, if you have all of the elements in a design selected, and only some of the elements are locked, clicking the Lock Element toolbar button will lock the unlocked elements. In this case you would need to select Edit->Unlock Element to unlock the locked elements. You can perform this function at the design level to lock all the elements in a design. You cannot perform this function at the project level. When you have an item locked (an element or design), and you try to perform an operation that affects the locked element, you will receive a message that warns you that the operation will affect at least one locked element. You will not be able to perform the operation until you unlock all affected elements. For example, you could lock one element in a design. If you then select the entire design and attempt to scale it, you will receive this message. Change Element Type (Available in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro + only) DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

125 Editing Tools 111 This feature allows you to select an element and change it to another element. Besides being able to replace one element type with another element type, you can also add an element type to another element type. This feature can be used on all element types except Manual Stitch. Example of when to replace an element type: A walk stitch used to outline a design just doesn't seem to be wide enough to stand out on a "plush" type of fabric (i.e., thick fleece) that the design is being sewn on. In this case, you can select the walk stitch outline, click on the Change Element Type toolbar button, select singleline column, click Replace. This will be much thicker and show up better on the fabric. Example of when to add an element type: After creating a complex fill, it is a lot faster to use the Change Element Type to add a border to the fill instead of digitizing around it. To do this, simply create a complex fill, click on the Change Element Type toolbar button, select walk stitch or column stitch, then click Add. This is also very useful for changing fills to walk or singleline column for applique purposes. There are three different methods for changing element type. They are through the View Window, the project view, or through the Edit Menu. You can convert one or more expanded elements Rev. A Editing

126 112 Editing Tools When using the Change Element Type function, some minor editing may need to be performed after. This is especially true around corners of elements and first and last points of columns. You can edit your new element just as you would any other digitized element. Changing Element Type Through the View Window or Project View: 1. Right-click on the element. 2. Select Change Element Type from the pop-up menu. Changing Element Type Through the Edit Menu: 1. Select the element. 2. Select Edit->Change Element Type. You can always edit an element that you have added or replaced. When you have a complex fill selected that has a hole in it, you will get one element for the complex fill and another element for the hole. You can also select multiple elements to change as long as they are of the same element type (e.g., all complex fills). When you add new items, they will be inserted (in the Project View stitchlist) directly after the element that they were created from except for the following cases: When you create a walk, click on Change Element Type, select complex fill, then click Add: The complex fill will be inserted before the walk because there is an assumption that the walk is supposed to be the border. When you have created an element (i.e. fill or column) and choose to Add a Singleline With Input Line: The Singleline column will always be inserted before the original element because there is an assumption that the singleline is to be the border. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

127 Editing Tools 113 Below are pictures of the dialogs for Change Element Type: From Walk Normal Stitch to Singleline or Complex Fill From Complex Fill to Walk Normal Stitch, Walk Bean Stitch, or Singleline. From Singleline to Walk Normal Stitch, Walk Bean Stitch, or Complex Fill. In the case of the Singleline Column, you also have the option to use the edge of the column or the input line. When using Edge, complex fill is no longer an option, but singleline is added to the list. You Rev. A Editing

128 114 Editing Tools should use Edge when you want to put a border around a singleline column. Split Element (Available in DesignShop, DesignShop Pro, DesignShop Pro +) You have the ability to split elements using this feature. You must first select a point in your element where you would like the split to occur. Then click on the Split Element button or select Edit->Split Element. The point that you had selected will exist in both of the new elements. You can split all types of columns and walk stitches. The following rules apply: You can only split on a straight point, not on a curved point, because splitting on a curved point would change the shape of the element. You cannot split at the ends of an element. For Column 2, you must select two points to split, one on each side. Hold down the CTRL key to select multiple points. For Column 1, you can only select one point because column 1s have matching pairs. Center Design (Available in all product levels) This feature places the design's center in the exact center of the peripheral's sewing field. This is an important step before sewing the design. You can find this function in two locations: the toolbar button and under the Edit Menu. Color Change (Available in all product levels) A color change is an instruction to the peripheral to pause for a rethread on a single-needle machine, or to change to a different needle on a multi-needle machine. It also changes the color in the View Window to the next color in the color palette. This function also inserts a color change command after the currently DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

129 Editing Tools 115 highlighted data-set in the stitch list (in the Project Tree View). To insert a color change, left-click on an item (e.g., an element) to highlight it. Then insert a color change by doing one of the following: clicking the Color Change shortcut button, selecting Insert->Color Change, or right-clicking in the View Window and selecting Color Change from the pop-up menu. You could also use the keyboard shortcut: F6 (but only with lettering). To delete a color change, simply left-click the color change and press the DELETE key on your keyboard (or right-click the selected color change and select Delete from the pop-up menu). You can also move a color change by left-clicking the color change in the Project Tree View, holding down the left mouse button, and dragging the color change to the desired location. Trim (Available in all product levels) A trim command causes peripherals equipped with trimmers to perform a trim. This function also inserts a trim command after the currently highlighted data-set in the stitch list. To insert a trim, left-click on an item (e.g., an element) in the Project View to highlight it. Then insert a trim by doing one of the following: clicking the trim shortcut button, selecting Insert->Trim, or right-clicking in the View Window and selecting Trim from the pop-up menu. To delete a trim, simply left-click the trim and press the DELETE key on your keyboard (or right-click the selected trim and select Delete from the pop-up menu). You can also move a trim by left-clicking the color change in the Project Tree View, holding down the left mouse button, and dragging the trim to the desired location Rev. A Editing

130 116 Editing Tools DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

131 4. LETTERING IN THIS CHAPTER: Inserting Lettering Lettering Properties Lettering Tools Rev. A Melco Embroidery Systems

132 118 Inserting Lettering Inserting Lettering Besides pressing the lettering input tool, you can also press CTRL + T on your keyboard to begin a lettering element. To insert lettering into a project, click the Lettering toolbar button (or select Insert->Lettering). When you left-click in the View Window, you will see a blinking cursor. You will also see a floating dialog (see image below). To use more than one alphabet in a lettering object, type some lettering, then change the alphabet in the floating dialog. Press ENTER to return to the lettering, and type remaining letters. You can use this dialog to change the alphabet, letter height and letter width before you type the lettering. If you make any changes in the dialog, left-click in the View Window again to type the lettering. Type the lettering, then press ENTER. (If you want to type more than one line of lettering, press CTRL + ENTER to start a new line.) You will see a selection box around the lettering. (NOTE: If you want to open the Lettering Properties tab before you type the lettering, press the ENTER key before typing any lettering.) When the lettering is selected, you can click the Lettering toolbar button, then left-click in the lettering to remove or insert letters if desired. You can also leftclick in the lettering, and use the shortcut keyboard commands to insert color changes, trims and/or customized spacing. See pg. 122 for more information on these commands. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

133 Inserting Lettering 119 Individual Letter Selection The selection box around the lettering object can be used to scale the lettering (handles can be clicked and dragged to resize the entire lettering object). Each letter also has its own handle (see image below). letter handle Left-click a letter s handle to select the letter. When a letter is selected, a selection box will appear around it. You can left-click the letter handle, hold down the mouse button, and drag the handle to move a letter left or right. If you press and hold the CTRL key, you can left-click the letter handle and drag the letter up or down. You can click and drag the handles of the selection box to scale the individual letter (when a letter is scaled, the spacing on each side of the letter will automatically be adjusted). To rotate a selected letter, right-click and select Rotate from the popup menu. You can also change the properties of the individual letter (right click and select Properties from the popup menu). When an individual letter is selected, the entry and exit points of that letter will be displayed (see the following image). Click and drag these points to move them Rev. A Lettering

134 120 Inserting Lettering To edit the digitized points of a selected letter, click the Edit Mode button when a letter is selected. The digitized points will be displayed (see the following image), and you can delete, insert, or move points if desired. NOTE: You can access the properties of existing lettering just as you would with any other element: left-click the lettering to highlight it (in the View Window or Project View), then rightclick and select Properties from the pop-up menu (or select View->Properties). You can also double-click the lettering element. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

135 Lettering Properties 121 Lettering Properties This section explains the properties that affect lettering. The properties that are unique to lettering are found on the Lettering properties tab. To access this tab, double-click a lettering object, or right-click the lettering object and select Properties from the pop-up menu. Lettering Tab For tutorials on inserting lettering, adjusting lettering properties, and using lettering tools, see Chapter 10. Text Dialog Box When you click inside the large white box, your cursor will appear in the top left corner. This is where you will type out your text design. Lettering Font Preview To select the font or alphabet that you would like the text design to appear in, left-click on the down arrow of the alphabet pull-down menu, located under the text dialog box. The alphabet pull-down menu provides a preview of each alphabet Rev. A Lettering

136 122 Lettering Properties installed on your computer. When the pull-down menu is open, place your mouse cursor over an alphabet name. This will show you a preview of that alphabet. (See image below). For details on using the currently selected alphabet, click the Code Sheets button, and the alphabet code sheet for that alphabet will open. (All code sheets are located in the alphabets.pdf file that was installed with DesignShop. Clicking the Code Sheets button will open the pdf file to the page for the selected alphabet.) Because there are no code sheets for the True Type fonts, clicking the Code Sheets button when a True Type font is selected will open the first page of the code sheets file. If you have the DesignShop product level or higher, you will be able to preview True Type fonts as well as embroidery alphabets. AutoFont allows True Type fonts to be used as embroidery alphabets. These True Type fonts will be visible in the alphabet pull-down menu (they are identified by the True Type symbol). You can then select any of these True Type fonts from the alphabet pull-down menu and set the desired lettering parameters. Color Change Command (keyboard shortcut F6) A color change command will instruct the peripheral to pause for a rethread on single-needle machines, or to change to a different needle on a multi-needle machine. It also changes the color in the View Window to the next color in the palette.to add a color change in the text dialog box, place the cursor between the letters and click. A ^ symbol marks the color change. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

137 Lettering Properties 123 Customized Spacing Sometimes text is too crowded or too loosely spaced. This often happens to arc and script lettering. For crowded lettering, place the cursor in the lettering text box between the letter that are too close together. Click the button or press F8 to add space. Click OK (or Apply) and the letters will move farther apart. A > symbol will appear in the text box. Each > adds a space equal to 1/16 of the letter height. For example, with a 1" letter, the space would be 1/16." With a 0.5" letter, the space would be 1/32." You can also decrease the space between letters that are too far apart. Again, you should place the cursor in the text box between the Increases Space = F8 Decreases Space = F7 letters that are too far apart in the text dialog box. Next click the button or press F7 and a < symbol will appear in the text box. Click OK (or Apply) and the letters will move closer together. Each < subtracts a space equal to 1/16 of the letter height. NOTE: You can also adjust spacing of a lettering element in the View Window. Left-click the letter handle, hold down the mouse button, and drag the handle to move a letter to the left or right. Trim (keyboard shortcut F9) A trim command causes peripherals equipped with trimmers to perform a trim between each letter. Trims between lower case script lettering are unnecessary. Add a trim in the text dialog box placing your cursor (left-clicking) between the letters you want to trim. When the cursor appears, click the button or press F9. A symbol will appear in the text dialog box to mark the trim. There will be no visible difference in the View Window. Letter Height This is where you can set the overall height of a capital letter. The default is one inch Rev. A Lettering

138 124 Lettering Properties Letter Width This increases or decreases the overall width of each letter. The value is set at 100%, which is actual size. To increase the letter width, type in a percentage that is greater than 100% up to 190%. To decrease the letter width, type in a percentage less than 100% down to 0%. Below is an example: Slant Angle This inclines lettering in increments of one from +60 to -60. Positive values slant lettering to the right and negative values slant lettering to the left. Below is an example: You can also slant lettering on the workspace screen. To do this, leftclick a selected lettering object. Then left-click and drag any handle (except for corner handles) to slant the lettering. Stitch Length This determines the length of each walk or manual stitch used to move from one area of sewing to another or as the underlay. These stitches are often covered by column stitching. The default is 30 points for 1 inch letter height. Use the table below as a guide when changing letter height: Lettering Size Stitch Length 0.5 inch or greater points 0.25 inch to 0.5 inch points 0.25 inch or smaller points DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

139 Lettering Properties 125 Connections Setting This setting determines how letters are connected (i.e., the locations of each letter s entry and exit points). Select the desired setting from the pull-down menu. The following options are available: As Digitized - Connections between letters are not changed (entry and exit points remain as they were digitized). Closest Point - Entry and exit points will be inserted at the closest point between the letters. Bottom Connect - Entry and exit points will be inserted so that letters are connected at the bottom. Auto-Borders This feature adds borders around the selected lettering. To turn on this feature, check the box next to Auto-Borders On. To edit the properties of the borders, click the button Borders On. You will see the following dialog. next to Auto- In the dialog you can select the stitch type of the borders (the options are Satin, Walk Bean, and Walk Normal). When Satin is selected as the Stitch Type, you can also enter a density (default value is 4 points) and column width (default value is 10 points) for the borders. When either Walk Bean or Walk Normal is selected, you can enter a stitch length value (default value is 10 points). Check the box next to Stitch Borders Last to stitch borders after all letters have been stitched. Check the box next to Add Color Change Rev. A Lettering

140 126 Lettering Properties to insert color changes. Note that if Stitch Borders Last and Add Color Change are both turned on, one color change will be inserted, between the last letter sewn and the first border sewn. If Add Color Change is turned on and Stitch Borders Last is turned off, a color change will be inserted between each letter and its border. If Stitch Letters is turned off (box is unchecked) borders will be sewn without letters. The default for this setting is on. To select an underlay for the lettering borders, select from the Underlay pull-down menu. If you do not select an underlay, the borders will be sewn with the same underlay as the lettering. Click OK to apply your changes and close the Auto-Borders dialog. If you click the Save As Default button in the Lettering Properties tab, any changes you have made in the Auto-Borders dialog will be saved as the default values. For instructions on using monogram alphabets and their borders, please refer to the alphabet code sheet for that alphabet. (alphabets.pdf, also located in your HTML Help System). Group Names See pg. 135 for detailed information on creating and using Group Names. Monogram You can use a non-monogram alphabet to create a monogram by clicking in the box next to monogram. A check mark in the box symbolizes that this function is on, whereas no check mark symbolizes that this function is off. For standard monogram alphabets (3 letter alphabets like 3 Letter Circle), you don t have to turn on the Monogram feature in DesignShop. This is automatically turned on for you. Monogram Properties When using a non-monogram alphabet you have the option to change the letter height and/or density of the individual monogram letters, click the Monogram Properties button (this button appears when the Monogram box is checked). The following dialog box will appear: DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

141 Lettering Properties 127 Justification Here you can select the justification of your lettering job, i.e., justify all lettering to the left, center, or to the right. This does not work for monograms. Sequenced Lettering There are many options available that can be applied to the stitch order of your letters or lines of text: Letter Stitch Order This option gives you more control of how each letter will sew out. Left to Right : Stitching will start with the left letter and proceed to the right. Here is an example of changing line spacing: If you have 1.00 inch letter height you could add half of that (.50) to equal 1.50 inch line spacing for a sufficient amount of space between the lines. Right to Left : Stitching will start with the right letter and proceed to the left. Center Out : Stitching with start in the middle and proceed to the farthest right, then come back to center and proceed to the farthest left. NOTE: Center out stitching is commonly used to solve problems with registration that sometimes occur when sewing on caps and difficult fabrics. Line Stitch Order This option gives you more control of how each line will sew out Rev. A Lettering

142 128 Lettering Properties Top to Bottom : Stitching order will start with the top line of letters and proceed to the bottom line. Bottom to Top : Stitching will start with the bottom line of letters and proceed to the top. Line Wrapping : Stitching will start at the side specified by the letter stitch option, left-to-right or right-to-left and alternate the direction for each of the lines of the lettering object. Center out letter stitch order is not available with line wrapping. Spacing Horizontal Spacing: By putting a positive value here, space will be added in between the letters. A negative value will take away space between the letters. Line Spacing: If you have multiple lines of text, you can increase or decrease the spacing between the separate lines. This is adjusted when letter height is changed. Vertical Spacing: By putting a positive value here, vertical height will be added in between each letter, so that each letter is higher than the one before. A negative value will cause each letter to be lower than the one before. Fabric Adjust When you click on this button, a Fabric Adjust dialog box will appear. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

143 Lettering Properties 129 Because lettering is so exact and may be very small, it is possible for the actual sewout to turn out different from the way that it looks in the View Window when it was digitized. This is especially true when you are sewing on different types of material. The lettering may bunch up or become knotted, even in a way that is illegible. This may happen because of the material that you are sewing on. You can prevent this from happening by first turning on Use Fabric Adjust, then selecting the type of fabric that you are using. Select the fabric by left-clicking on one of the types. (Light knit is an example of type.) After you have selected the type of fabric, you must select the Letter Size Range as well. Fabric Adjust will not implement any changes without both the Fabric and the Letter Size Range being selected. After you have selected the fabric and letter size range, Fabric Adjust will change some of the default settings on the Lettering Properties. You will notice a change in Stitch Length on the Lettering Tab. You will also notice changes in Density, Column Width, and Primary Underlay Type on the Column Tab. After the Fabric Adjust settings have been applied, you can still adjust the lettering properties. For example, you may think the column width needs to be increased. You can increase the value used by Fabric Adjust. Styles Lettering styles are named collections of lettering properties that can be loaded and saved from the lettering properties page. Styles Rev. A Lettering

144 130 Lettering Properties include all user specified lettering properties, column properties, and lock stitch properties. Lettering styles can be saved by clicking on the Styles button, type the name for your style, click Save, then click OK. the new style will be added to your list of styles. To load an already saved style, left click on the Styles button, click on the drop-down arrow and select the desired style, click Load, then click OK. NOTE: Styles are saved in the Design Shop\Styles\directory. Two types of files can exist in this directory: files ending in the extension ST1 (Design Shop\Styles\*.ST1) and ST2 (Design Shop\Styles\*.ST2). The files of type *.ST1 are EDS III styles and files of type *.ST2 are DesignShop styles. You may copy your previously saved files from EDS III into this directory and they can be read into Design Shop, then saved as DesignShop styles. You cannot read Design Shop styles into EDS III. Base Line Setting This setting allows you to change the type of base line, which is the line at the bottom of the lettering. (See the following image). base line Changing the base line type adds special effects to your lettering by changing letter layout and/or appearance. The following base line types are available: Straight Line - The bottoms of the letters are arranged along a straight, horizontal line. This is the default setting. Vertical Line - The letters are arranged along a straight, vertical line. The base line runs through the centers of the letters. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

145 Lettering Properties 131 Arc - The bottoms of the letters are arranged on an arc. You can change the radius and angle of the arc, and the direction of the lettering (clockwise or counter-clockwise). The settings are displayed when Arc is selected in the pull-down menu. Arc Radius: The radius of a circle is the distance from the center of the circle to the circumference of the circle. The longer the radius, the less the amount of curvature in the arc (an arc is a piece of a circle). Arc Angle: The arc angle is a position on a circle where the center of your lettering will be located. This position is entered in degrees, with 0 (zero) degrees being the top of a circle, and 180 degrees being the bottom of a circle Rev. A Lettering

146 132 Lettering Properties Angle Type CW or CCW: The angle type is a direction of sewing. In most cases, you will want to be sewing in a CW (clockwise) direction if the arc angle is in the top half of a circle. You will want to be sewing in a CCW (counter-clockwise) direction if the arc angle is in the bottom half of the circle. A common occurrence when sewing counterclockwise is that the letters may touch. To correct this, you must use some positive horizontal spacing between the letters. Tip on the Counter-Clockwise Direction: Look at the first image below. Even though the word Denver was entered first before Colorado, the design sews as shown above when you have your arc properties set at 180 degrees and CCW. This can be corrected by making the Line Spacing a negative DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

147 Lettering Properties 133 value, (example -1) instead of the default 1. The sewout will then look like the second image below. You can also change the arc settings in the DesignShop View Window. When Arc is selected for the base line type for a lettering object, a radius will be drawn with the lettering (see the following image). You can drag and drop the endpoints of this radius to change the radius length and arc angle. drag and drop to change radius length and arc angle Custom - When Custom line type is selected, you can insert points along the base line, then move these points to change the shape of the base line. See pg. 94 for more instructions on inserting and editing wireframe points Rev. A Lettering

148 134 Lettering Properties Perspective - When Perspective line type is selected, two points at the end of the base line are created. A top line is also created, with points at the ends. These points can be dragged and dropped to add perspective to the lettering. See pg. 94 for more instructions on inserting and editing wireframe points. Bridged - When Bridged line type is selected, a top line is created. Points can be added to this top line and the base line, and these points can be dragged and dropped to create various effects. See pg. 94 for more instructions on inserting and editing wireframe points. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

149 Lettering Tools 135 The other Lettering properties tabs are described in detail in the Editing chapter of this manual: Column Tab, pg. 69 Lock/Trim Tab, pg. 54 View Tab, pg. 53 Position Tab, pg. 59 Scale Tab, pg. 60 Status Tab, pg. 62 Lettering Tools The editing tools described in Chapter Two function the same when using them with lettering elements. See Chapter Two for more information on these tools. Group Names (Available in DesignShop and higher product levels) Group Names allows you to add a single replaceable lettering field to a project and a list of names to be stitched into that field whenever you save the project to condensed or expanded files. This list of names becomes part of the project. When working with group names, choosing the position and lettering properties will often involve some experimentation and compromise considering that the length of names to be substituted often varies considerably. Preview capability allows substitution of any selected name into the replaceable field at design time to assist with Rev. A Lettering

150 136 Lettering Tools those choices. The full range of lettering properties are available but cannot be varied from name to name (with the exception of spacing and color changes between letters). Similarly, the position of the Group Names field is fixed and cannot be varied from name to name during a single File->Save As operation. It is, of course, possible to select File->Save As to generate expanded or condensed file output, then adjust the position of the field, reselect long names, and generate another expanded or condensed file. While Group Names will most commonly be used to individualize uniforms for members of sports teams, the capability is generally applicable to batch personalization of multiple embroidered garments. A simple database of available names is associated with the project and can be updated, altered, and multiple different sets of names can be selected from available names. Copying the project file copies the available names but the list can be cleared and repopulated with a new set of names, possibly for a different customer. Risks of stitching an incorrect or misspelled name on a garment are reduced by allowing copies of the selected list to be made to the windows clipboard and then ed or faxed to customers prior to actually generating the expanded or condensed files. Sending a copy of this list to your printer can provide identification of any particular name with the appropriately sized garment when not stitching on one-size fits all items. The range of output options must be set prior to choosing File->Save As to generate either expanded or condensed files. These output options can be set from the same property page you will use to manage the lists of available and selected names. There are five options that result in generating from one file containing copies of the design and one name for all of the selected group names through separate files for each of the names. Understanding which option to choose from this list will allow you to shorten the total time required to stitch out embroidery designs that incorporate group names. Creating Group Names As you can see, there is considerable power and flexibility in the DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

151 Lettering Tools 137 Group Names feature, but the workflow to add group names to any existing project could hardly be simpler. 1. Open a new screen in DesignShop. (Or if you wish to add group names to an existing design, open the design). 2. Click the Lettering toolbar button (or select Insert->Lettering). (To use group names functionality with an existing lettering object, double-click the lettering; proceed to Step 5). 3. Left-click in the View Window; you will see a blinking cursor. 4. Press ENTER. The Lettering properties tab will be displayed. NOTE: The Group Names will pick up the properties from the current settings in the Lettering parameters. If you did not start with a lettering object, Group Names will appear in the text box. 5. Choose the desired text values for the Group Names (example: Alphabet style, letter height, Column width, etc). 6. To turn on Group Names, left-click in the checkbox next to Group Names, then click applied).. (Any changes you made in Step 5 will be 7. The Group Names properties dialog will be displayed Rev. A Lettering

152 138 Lettering Tools Group Names tutorial: pg. 312 The Group Names properties dialog allows you to add, import, paste, clear, copy to clipboard, and otherwise select names from the available list. Note that the list boxes are intentionally not selfsorting so that names will remain in the order added. 8. You can select the output format before or after entering the names. (See pg. 141 for descriptions of the output options.) 9. To add names (use one of the following methods): Add: Click on the Add Button. This will make a small edit window available to immediately type each name. You can type a list of names, separated by commas into that window (example: John Jones, Mary, Greg Smith, Lisa, Paul Johnson). Click on the Add button again to insert the names into the Available Names list. NOTE: You should be aware that when you enter a name such as Mary Jo Williams, the first name will be considered Mary and the last name Jo Williams. If this is not what you want to happen to such names you should type Mary Jo as Mary_Jo. It will appear as Mary_Jo in the list but when stitched out the "_" will be replaced by a space. NOTE: Clicking Clear will delete any highlighted names (left-click a name to highlight it) in the Available Names box. Paste: Click on the Paste button. The names will be inserted in the Available Names list. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

153 Lettering Tools 139 NOTE: Prior to doing this, the names must first be pasted to the clipboard from another application. When using another application, a carriage return is the same as typing a comma in the Add section. Import: Click on the Import button. The Open dialog box is displayed to choose the directory and text files to insert. Click on the file and the names will be inserted in the Available Names list. NOTE: Prior to doing this, the files need to be saved as a *.txt file from another application (for example NotePad). When using another application, a carriage return is the same as typing a comma in the Add section. Open Group: Click this button to open a group names file that was previously created and saved. An Open dialog will be displayed, and you can navigate to the desired group names file (*.grn) to open it. (See Step 12 for information on saving a group names file). 10. Once all the names have been added to the list: Click the All button (>>) to move all the names to the Selected Names box. Or, click on the specific name then click the (>) to send the names one at a time. NOTE: You can edit the spacing, color changes, and trims for individual names. Once a name has been added to the Selected Rev. A Lettering

154 140 Lettering Tools Names list, left-click to select a name, then click OK to return to the Lettering tab. Here you can adjust the spacing and insert color changes and trims for the selected name only. 11. Choose First, Last or Both. The names displayed in the Selected Name list are the names that will sew. Even if only using the first name, always store the first and last name for added flexibility at a later time. To modify the Selected Name list, click on the (<<) button to empty the list of Selected Names. Or select a specific name and click the (<) button delete it from the list. If Copy to Clipboard is clicked, the names in the Selected Name list will go to the Clipboard to be used in another application (such as a text editor). 12. If you wish to save the list of group names as a group names file, click the Save Group button. A Save As dialog will be displayed. Navigate to the desired location and type a name for the group names file. The file (which will contain names and lettering properties) will now be available for future use. 13. Select an Output Option (see explanations below). When saving just lettering, it does not matter which Option is selected. 14. Click on OK or Apply. 15. If desired, reposition the lettering. Remember that only a single position for the Group Names field is available each time you generate expanded or condensed files 16. Click on File->Save As. 17. Type the file name and desired directory to save in. 18. Select condensed or expanded (the file must be saved as condensed or expanded format before it can be stitched). 19. Click on OK. 20. Select File->Save As again and save the file as an ofm file. This will give you a project file you can edit in the future. 21. The group names are now ready to be sewn. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

155 Lettering Tools 141 Editing Group Name Lists Once a name has been added to the Selected Names list, you can left-click to select a name, then click OK to return to the Lettering tab. Here you can edit the selected name only. When you return to Group Names, your changes will be applied. You can also edit the Available Names list and the order of the names using NotePad or any word processor. First, if there are any names in the Selected Names box, click << to empty the list of selected names. Then click >> to place a complete copy of Available Names into Selected Names. Select the Both radio button to assure that the complete name is showing for each. Next click Copy to Clipboard to copy the list of Selected Names to the Windows clipboard and then paste it into whatever text editor you regularly use. You may note some additional information enclosed parenthetically but you can ignore it as balanced parentheses and enclosed text will be removed when pasting or importing files. With the list in your favorite editor you are free to edit it, then copy it to place it back into the clipboard. Printing this list will assist the embroidery machine operator to associate the proper garment with the name. You can also associate comments with each name in the list as in the following example: John Jones (male left pocket) Mary Jo Williams (female small left sleeve) NOTE: As mentioned above, balanced parenthesis and their contents will be ignored and ends-of-line can be substituted for commas to separate names. Beware of open parenthesis without a balancing close as you may lose names from the list. The real power of this multi-step editing process is that lists of Available Names can be quickly extracted from without risk of misspelling and copied back to or fax before stitching to verify the names with customers. Output Options The reason there are so many output options that result in a single file is that large Group Name jobs can be run simultaneously on multi-head machines. Generally, when stitching on a single-head Rev. A Lettering

156 142 Lettering Tools machine you will use option 1, i.e. Design, Name, Repeat and change garments on color changes after the name, or use option 5, Separate Files, for greater control of the process. Design, Name, Repeat When saved in this format, the design and group names are saved together. The embroidery machine will sew the design, the first named typed, the design, the next name and so on. Design Once When saved in this format the machine will sew the design once and then each name saved. This format is usually used for multi-head machines when the same design is sewn on all the heads, and then each name is sewn on each garment (the garment on one head is sewn on, while all other heads are turned off). Names Only When saved in this format, the design will not be saved with the Group Names. This usually means the design is already sewn on the garment, then you decide you want group names added. This is typically used for a single head machine. Design Only When saved in this format, the design sews where you place it in relation to the names for a later time. This is typically used for a multihead machine. Separate Files When saved in this format, each name will be saved as a separate design. The first two characters of multiple group name files are numeric, i.e. 01Bill.exp 02Mary.exp, etc. These files can be used at a later date. When these files are placed on a diskette and viewed on a sewing peripheral, the numeric order will help the operator keep them in sequence. You should choose the output directory carefully when generating multiple group names files to avoid mixing these with designs that do not contain group names. To assist in making this distinction, the first two characters of multiple group name files are numeric, i.e. 01Bill.exp 02Mary.exp, etc. so they will sort to the top of the list in DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

157 Lettering Tools 143 Explorer when the list is sorted on name. NOTE: After the design has been saved in Condensed or Expanded format, a color change command will be inserted after each Group Name. Sewing Group Names 1. Open the group names design in DesignShop. 2. The design will open with the names on top of each other with color changes added. 3. Send the file to the machine. 4. When programming the design to sew, use a P as Color 1 (in the machine Color menu) to force the machine to stop after sewing each name. This will enable you to insert the next hoop and press start to sew the next name. (Melco embroidery machines only, with the exception of the AMAYA) All of this sounds more complex than it actually is, and once you have used group names for one to two projects your productivity in using it to personalize designs will soar by comparison with any other method, in any other embroidery design system. Being able to allow the production department to manage the database of names from computers that do not necessarily have DesignShop installed allows the workflow to be distributed in shops where networks may include multiple production workstations but only a single DesignShop design station. Using Group Names with Step and Repeat (Step and Repeat is only available with DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro+) Group Names can be used with the Step and Repeat function to duplicate a design in a matrix format (in columns and rows) with a group of names. Please see pg. 238 for details on Step and Repeat. Converting Lettering To Wireframe (Available in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro +) Once you have completed a lettering element, you can convert the lettering to wireframe. By doing this, the lettering will be converted Rev. A Lettering

158 144 Lettering Tools to complex fills, columns, and/or walk stitches that can easily be edited. This is very useful when you would like to edit individual parts of letters within a lettering element. There are four ways to convert lettering elements to wireframe data: through the toolbar button, through the View Window, though the Project View, or through the Edit menu. You can change one lettering element or multiple lettering elements at a time. The easiest way to convert lettering to wireframe is through the toolbar button: 1. Select the lettering element 2. Click on the toolbar button. To convert lettering to wireframe data through the View Window or Project View: 1. Right-click on the element. 2. Select Convert Lettering To Wireframe from the pop-up menu. Converting lettering to wireframe data through the Edit menu: 1. Select the lettering element. 2. Select Edit->Convert Lettering To Wireframe. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

159 5. DIGITIZING IN THIS CHAPTER: Introduction to Digitizing Working with Graphics Digitizing Manual and Walk Stitches Digitizing Column Stitches Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches Additional Digitizing Tools Custom Files Auto Shapes Rev. A Melco Embroidery Systems

160 146 Introduction to Digitizing Introduction to Digitizing With DesignShop, you have the ability to perform onscreen digitizing by creating new embroidery elements. To do this, you will click the toolbar button for the element type that you want to create. There are several input sequences that are used for the various elements. These input sequences are described in detail in this chapter. The following list contains some general digitizing tips and guidelines: You will use the left mouse button to input straight points and the right mouse button for curve points. Straight points appear as a small triangle; curve points appear as a small circle. All elements start with a straight point and end with either the ENTER key or the middle mouse button, if available. For shapes that are curved, you will need to alternate between left-click and right-clicks. If you make a mistake or click too many points, simply press the BACKSPACE key on your keyboard to delete the last input point. Each time the BACKSPACE key is pressed, the input points will be deleted in sequence. If you press the ESC key while you are digitizing an element, the element will be cancelled. To determine proper sewing order of elements: When digitizing, always keep in mind that you want the embroidery peripheral to be able to sew from one element to another with very little movement in between the elements. Depending on which input tool you have selected, the stitch types displayed in the Input bar will be different. If you have a column input tool selected, the following stitch types will be displayed E-Stitch, Fill Stitch). (Satin Stitch, Zigzag Stitch, DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

161 Introduction to Digitizing 147 If you have the complex fill or complex fill hole input tool selected, the following stitch types will be displayed Fill). (Standard Fill, Satin Fill, Pattern Fill, Decorative Quick Change Tools (Available only in DesignShop Pro +) Quick Change Tools allows you to save up to four preset values for both density and stitch length. You can also select up to four different preset partition fills. Toolbar buttons (see the following image) provide quick access to these preset values as you are digitizing (when you click one of these toolbar buttons, the value -e.g., densityin element property tabs will be changed to reflect the applied preset value). To use these toolbar buttons, first you need to enter the desired preset values. To do this, right-click any of the buttons. This will open the following dialog. In this dialog you can enter up to four values for both density and stitch length, and each of these values corresponds to a toolbar Rev. A Digitizing

162 148 Working with Graphics button. Here you can also select up to four partition fills. After changing these values, click OK to close the dialog and apply the changes. To use these tools when digitizing, click the input tool you will be digitizing with. The Quick Change tools you can use with the selected input tool will become active. Click the Quick Change toolbar button that corresponds to the desired preset value (for example, if you want to digitize with a density of 3, and you have set Density 1 to 3, click the Density 1 toolbar button). The value associated with the button you clicked will be applied to all digitizing from this point forward. The property value used in digitizing will change if you click another Quick Change button or change the value in the element type s property tab. Working with Graphics Working with Graphics tutorials: pg. 296 NOTE: This applies to DesignShop, DesignShop Pro, and DesignShop Pro +. Before you begin digitizing, you may want to have an image on the monitor screen. This can be done by scanning a new design or loading an existing graphic image file. Loading You can load an existing graphic image by selecting File->Open or by clicking the Open button. Then browse your computer s directories to find the desired graphic. NOTE: (You can also select File->Insert or click the Insert button.) DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

163 Working with Graphics 149 You can load and save graphics in the following formats: Format Acronym Format Description Extension BMP Windows (and OS/2) Bitmap.bmp JPEG Industry Standard Compressed Format.jpg PCX PC Paintbrush Format (ZSOFT).pcx TIFF Tagged Information File Format.tif Please note that if you are using the DesignShop product level, you can only open bmp files (you can save all graphic types). Scanning (DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro + product levels only) After digitizing stitches in a design, the graphic is automatically saved with the project file (.ofm). However, if you are saving to a floppy disk, you must save them separately. The other option is to scan an image directly into DesignShop. The scanning function allows you to scan a design directly into the monitor screen for on-screen digitizing. This function works with any scanner that complies with the TWAIN scanning industry standard communications format. You may buy any TWAIN compatible scanner to implement scanning in DesignShop. NOTE: TWAIN 32 compatible scanners are not the same as TWAIN compatible scanners and cannot be implemented from the DesignShop program. NOTE: Be advised that Melco cannot and does not provide technical support for any scanners in the marketplace. Any technical assistance that may be required with the scanner you purchase must be obtained through the scanner dealer. If you attempt to use a scanner that does not comply with TWAIN, you will not be able to access the scanning program directly from the DesignShop program. You must go into the scanning program independent from DesignShop to perform the scanning operation. Then you will be able to load any properly saved graphic files that have been scanned with that scanner. The only requirement for loading a graphic file is that the file format is one of the formats supported by DesignShop. The graphic load and save functions support most industry standard graphic formats. See the below section on loading for information on which formats are Rev. A Digitizing

164 150 Working with Graphics supported. An additional feature in the on-screen digitizing and scanning option allows you to import graphical data from the clipboard to the DesignShop View Window (using the Copy and Paste functions). This feature allows you to import graphics from any Windows-based application. Once loaded into the View Window, images can be scaled, rotated, dimmed, and zoomed to give you maximum flexibility in displaying your image for digitizing a design on screen. Select Scanner This function need only be performed when you start the scanning process for the first time. You will not need to return to this function unless you add a scanner or want to change to a different scanner that already exists in the system. The last scanner you select in this function will remain the default scanner indefinitely. 1. If you have just opened DesignShop, select File->New. If already in a View Window go to step 2 to start loading a graphic. 2. In the new View Window select File->Select Scanner. The Select Source dialog box will appear, showing the available TWAIN compatible scanners associated with your system. If your scanner does not appear in the Sources list, refer to the following discussion: For the Select Scanner function to identify the available TWAIN compatible scanners attached to the computer system, the TWAIN software that came with your scanner must first be properly installed and configured for your system. Melco has found that a common mistake is the failure to add the path for your scanner to the autoexec.bat file. Refer to your scanner manual and the Microsoft Windows User s Guide for information on modifying the autoexec.bat file. 3. Click on the source you wish to scan with to highlight the desired source. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

165 Working with Graphics Click on the Select button to choose the scanner and return to the current DesignShop window. Each time you open DesignShop and perform the scan function from this point forward, the scanner you just selected will remain the selected scanner. The scanner you select will remain the default scanner until you go into the Select Scanner function and select a different scanner. Scan DesignShop does not directly interface with any scanner. When you select Scan you are telling DesignShop to load the selected scanner s software to perform the scan and return the image to DesignShop. As a result, the screen that you see when you select Scan will depend on the software that came with your scanner. When the TWAIN driver you selected is finished, it will return the image to DesignShop for display. At that point you can change the size, orientation, etc. Scanning Tutorial: pg. 296 Select File->Scan Image. The selected scanner manufacturer s operating software will appear on the screen and the scanning operation will begin. You will be able to work inside the scanner operating software just as if you had opened it independent of the DesignShop program. Tips for Successful Scanning 1. High resolutions (such as 300 dpi) will consume lots of memory, and may slow down your system. 2. Color images may significantly slow your system and make it harder to see your stitches, even with dimmed graphics. 3. If you use color, use no higher color resolution than the driver you have installed in Windows. If your Windows uses 256 colors, then scanning a graphic as a 24 bit graphic makes it larger than it needs to be! Check your scanner manual for instructions to select your color resolution. After the scanning operation is completed and you close the scanner manufacturer s software program, the screen returns to the active DesignShop program and you may begin to perform some of the available image modifications or go directly to digitizing in the View Rev. A Digitizing

166 152 Working with Graphics Graphic Modification tutorials, pg. 297 Window. Graphic Modification NOTE: This applies to the DesignShop, DesignShop Pro and Design- Shop Pro + product levels. Once you have a graphic open in DesignShop, you can use DesignShop tools to modify the graphic. You can Hide/Show a graphic and Dim/Brighten a graphic using the View Menu. You also have the option to change the position, orientation, and the size of the graphic or image. These options are all available to you by double-clicking the graphic in the Project View. You can also Hide/Show a graphic by pressing the toolbar button or by right-clicking the graphic when it is selected and selecting the operation (Hide or Show Graphic) from the pop-up menu. When you doubleclick on the graphic, a Properties dialog with three tabs will appear. Under the Graphic General Properties tab you can view the name of the graphic and its location. The General Properties tab also gives you the ability to Hide/Show and Dim/Brighten the graphic. You can hide the graphic by putting a check mark beside Hide with your left mouse button. If the graphic is already hidden and a check mark appears beside Hide, then click again beside Hide to show the graphic. You may want to hide the graphic when you are digitizing. This will allow you to view the progress of your work better without the graphic behind the stitches. If you would like to see your stitches DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

167 Working with Graphics 153 a little bit better, but not completely hide your graphic, you can leftclick to place a check beside Dim. Left-click again to brighten the graphic. Click on the Position tab. Here you can change the position and orientation of the graphic. Position represents the number of embroidery points (1/254th of an inch) that the center of the image is offset from the center of the design (or View Window). This allows you to move your image with respect to the design. X offset allows you to move the image left or right. Enter positive values to move right; enter negative values to move left. Y offset allows you to move the image up or down. Enter positive values to move up; enter negative values to move down. Orientation gives you the ability to manipulate the horizontal and vertical presentation of the image. This function presents combinations of axis mirroring and axis property swapping in such a way to display the 8 different views in the orientation box as you click on the box. The F in the orientation box represents the orientation of the selected image on the screen. The third tab in the Graphic Properties is for scaling the graphic. You can also rotate graphics in the View Window; see pg Rev. A Digitizing

168 154 Working with Graphics The scale can be proportional or non-proportional depending on whether or not you have checked the Proportional box. If you leftclick beside Proportional, which places a check mark in the box, the horizontal scale is exactly the same as the vertical scale. This will keep the image from being distorted. If the Proportional box is not checked, then you can scale just the Horizontal axis or the Vertical axis. You can enter a percentage or a measurement. These are linked, so if you change a percentage the measurement changes proportionally. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

169 Digitizing Manual and Walk Stitches 155 The image modification attributes are only saved when you save them as part of a project. You can also perform the following basic functions with graphics: copy, cut, paste, delete, and duplicate. To access these functions when working with graphics, left-click the graphic in the Project View to select it, then right-click the graphic in the Project View or the View Window. You will see all of the functions in the pop-up menu. You can also access these functions by their toolbar buttons or through the Edit menu. See Basic Functions, pg. 28, for more information on these functions. NOTE: You cannot select a graphic in the View Window. You can only select it by left-clicking the graphic in the Project View. You can also edit the graphic after it has been opened in DesignShop. To do this, left-click the graphic in the Project View to select it, then right-click the graphic in the Project View or the View Window. You can then select Edit Graphic from the pop-up menu. This will open the graphic in your default graphics editing program (e.g., Microsoft Paint). When you have finished editing the graphic, save it, and close the graphics editor. Then return to DesignShop and click the OK button in the message box. This will reload the graphic with the changes you made. This procedure does not overwrite the current graphic. The edited graphic will be saved in an edited images folder in your DesignShop directory. If you have purchased Auto-Digitizing, which converts graphics to wireframe data, you can access the tool by right-clicking the selected graphic and selecting Convert Graphic to Wireframe from the When Design- Shop displays a design or image at actual size, it is displaying the information at one embroidery point per pixel, or 1 pixel per 1/254th of an inch. To display an image at actual size, you should scan the image at 254 pixels per inch or calculate the scale according to the following formula: scale = 254/ dpi where dpi is the dots per inch of the image. As an example: a 100 dpi image would have a scale of 2.54 (254/100) if you wanted to display the image at the original size for digitizing. pop-up menu. (You can also click the toolbar button Digitizing, pg. 243 for more information on this tool. ). See Auto- Digitizing Manual and Walk Stitches (Available in DesignShop and higher product levels). Manual and Walk elements are linear input methods that you create by entering the points in sequence from beginning to end Rev. A Digitizing

170 156 Digitizing Manual and Walk Stitches The four types of walk stitches discussed in this section are: normal, bean, jump, and decorative. Manual Stitch Manual Stitch tutorial: pg. 330 In this type of stitch, where you place the points is where your needle penetrations will be, without extra needle penetrations in between. The manual stitch is useful when you want to force longer stitch lengths. You can access the manual stitch by clicking the toolbar button, selecting Insert->Manual, or by right-clicking in the View Window and selecting Manual from the pop-up menu. You can only use straight points for digitizing a manual stitch. To digitize a manual stitch: 1. Left-click to input first needle point (penetration). 2. Left-click again to input the second needle point, and so on. Press the ENTER key to end the manual stitch element. If a point is entered incorrectly, pressing the BACKSPACE key on your keyboard will remove the points in reverse order. An example of when to use a manual stitch element would be when digitizing grass. When representing blades of grass with thread, you may not necessarily want needle penetrations throughout the blades of grass. When using walk stitch, needle penetrations are automatically input between the wireframe points, whereas, manual stitch has a long stitch from one wireframe point to the next. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

171 Digitizing Manual and Walk Stitches 157 Walk Normal Stitch Walk normal stitches are particularly useful in making underlay and outline stitching. The stitch length of the walk stitch determines when the needle comes down. Walk stitches are the most simple stitches to digitize. They can be generated in two methods: straight lines or automatic curves. You can access the Walk Stitch by clicking the toolbar button, selecting Insert->Walk, or by right-clicking in the View Window and selecting Walk from the pop-up menu. As an example, you would complete the following steps to digitize the outline of a square: NOTE: If a point is entered incorrectly, pressing the BACKSPACE key on your keyboard will remove the points in reverse order. You can also press ESC to cancel an entire walk stitch as you are digitizing. 1. Select Walk Stitch. 2. Left-click at the first corner of the square. 3. Go to the second corner and left-click. 4. Go to the third corner and left-click. 5. Go to the fourth corner and left click. 6. Go back to the first corner and left click. 7. Press ENTER on your keyboard. Steps 2-6 are displayed in the image below Rev. A Digitizing

172 158 Digitizing Manual and Walk Stitches Pressing and holding the ALT key as you input straight points will input perfectly straight lines. It doesn't matter how big the square is when you are using walk stitch; needle penetrations will be inserted every 30 points (default setting) along the way. Before you begin digitizing a walk stitch, you can right-click the toolbar button to change the properties, such as the stitch length. The changes you make will be applied on all future walk normal stitches, until you make any more changes. You can also change the properties of existing walk normal stitches (see Walk Stitch Properties, pg. 66 for information on changing stitch length and other walk stitch properties). If you have the DesignShop Product level or higher, you can also use Auto Shapes to digitize walk stitches (see pg. 203). DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

173 Digitizing Manual and Walk Stitches 159 As another example, you would complete the following steps to digitize the outline of a circle: 1. Select Walk Stitch. 2. Left-click to begin your circle. 3. Move the mouse down and to the right to create a diagonal line from the first point. Right-click. 4. Move the mouse down and to the left to a location that is aligned with the first point. Left-click. You should see half a circle. 5. Move the mouse up and to the left to a location that is aligned with the second point. Right-click. 6. Left-click over the first point you entered. 7. Press the ENTER key. Steps 2-6 are displayed in the image below. Remember that straight input points are represented by a small triangle and curved input points are represented by a small circle Walk Bean Stitch (Available in DesignShop and higher product levels). Where a normal stitch lays one length of thread down for each stitch, a bean stitch lays down three lengths of thread. The bean stitch design consists of laying down a normal stitch in the forward direction, then going back to the original start of that normal stitch Rev. A Digitizing

174 160 Digitizing Manual and Walk Stitches with another needle penetration, and again forward to the end of the first stitch with another needle penetration. The bean stitch is often used to digitize a thicker outline around an element. The input method is the same as the Walk Stitch element using a combination of straight and curve wireframe points. Left-click for straight points, right-click for curved points. You can access the Bean Stitch by clicking the toolbar button, selecting Insert->Bean, or by right-clicking in the View Window and selecting Bean from the pop-up menu. You can change the bean stitch length and the thickness of the stitch. Before you begin digitizing a bean stitch, you can right-click the toolbar button to change the properties. The changes you make will be applied on all future bean stitches, until you make any more changes. You can also change the properties of existing bean stitches. (See Walk Stitch Properties, pg. 66 for information on changing stitch length and other walk stitch properties). NOTE: If a point is entered incorrectly, pressing the BACKSPACE key on your keyboard will remove the points in reverse order. You can also press ESC to cancel an entire walk stitch as you are digitizing. If you have the DesignShop product level or higher, you can also use Auto Shapes to digitize walk bean stitches (see pg. 203). Walk Jump Stitch NOTE: This element is available for the DesignShop and higher product levels. The Walk Jump Stitch element is used to position the needle in the hoop without sewing stitches to the new position. The Walk Jump Stitch does not create needle penetrations; therefore it can be used to manually connect sections of designs and to position the needle outside of the boundaries of the design to position material for an applique. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

175 Digitizing Manual and Walk Stitches 161 The input method is the same as the Walk Stitch element using a combination of straight and curve wireframe points. Left-click for straight points, right-click for curved points. You can access the walk stitch by clicking the toolbar button, selecting Insert->Jump Stitch, or by right-clicking in the View Window and selecting Jump Stitch from the pop-up menu. You can change the stitch length of the jump stitch. Before you begin digitizing a jump stitch, you can right-click the toolbar button to change the properties. The changes you make will be applied on all future jump stitches, until you make any more changes. You can also change the properties of existing jump stitches. (see Walk Stitch Properties, pg. 66 for information on changing stitch length and other walk stitch properties). Decorative Stitch NOTE: This tool is only available in the DesignShop Pro and Design- Shop Pro + product levels. Decorative stitch is used to repeat a digitized design along a walk input line. Decorative stitches can consist of walks, columns, fills, and lettering or a combination of elements. You can choose from several decorative stitches included with DesignShop or create your own. Decorative stitches are saved in a custom file named CustomFactory.cff. If you have upgraded an existing DesignShop system to DesignShop 2004, you will need to complete the following steps to insert the new custom file and access the new standard decorative stitches. 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Select File->New. 3. Select Custom->Insert Custom File Rev. A Digitizing

176 162 Digitizing Manual and Walk Stitches 4. Navigate to the DesignShop installation directory (the default is C:\Program Files\Melco Embroidery Systems\Design Shop) 5. Select the file CustomFactory2004.cff. 6. Click OK. You will now be able to access the new decorative stitches. To use the standard decorative stitches The following standard decorative stitches are available with DesignShop. Bead Box (small) Button Holiday Star Tack Head Bows Bows in Satin Diamond Fan Ha Ha (Gothic Script) Ha Ha (Melco Script) Ha Ha (St. Louis Script) Just Squares Kiss Me Leaves Snowflakce Spin Star Trees Right-click the Decorative Stitch tool on the Input toolbar. You can also select Insert->Decorative Stitch, or you can right-click in the View Window and select Decorative Stitch from the pop-up menu. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

177 Digitizing Manual and Walk Stitches 163 Choose the stitch that you want to use from the pull-down menu. (Click the Stitch View/Select button for a preview of all of the available decorative stitches.) You can resize the decorative stitch by changing the width and height percentages. Click OK, then digitize the same as a normal walk stitch using straight and/or curved input points. Creating Decorative Stitches To create a decorative stitch, open the Custom Menu and select Create Decorative Stitch. A screen will pop up where you will create your decorative stitch Rev. A Digitizing

178 164 Digitizing Manual and Walk Stitches It is very useful to load a graphic into the DesignShop View Window before creating decorative stitches, so that you have a graphic to digitize more precisely. For a tutorial on creating decorative stitches, see pg. 331 Zoom in if needed and turn on the grid to be more exact. Select the input method (Manual or Walk stitch, Column, or Complex Fill) that you would like to digitize with. Follow the basic digitizing rules. It is very important that you start and end your element on the Stitch Line. If you end somewhere above or below the line, another stitch will be automatically generated for you to the stitch line and you may not get the desired decorative stitch. It is also very important to remember that you cannot begin and end your stitch in the same place. See the following Diamond decorative stitch example. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

179 Digitizing Manual and Walk Stitches 165.Once you are finished creating your decorative stitch, you can name it and save it. If saved, it will be added to the decorative stitch list that you can choose from within the Walk Stitch property page. Test Settings Walk Direction will give you a graphical example of how the decorative stitch will look in different directions. Stitch Length will modify the decorative stitch proportionally. Width will change the horizontal width of the decorative stitch. Height will change the vertical height of the decorative stitch Editing Decorative Stitches To edit decorative stitches select Custom->Edit Decorative Stitches. A pop-up dialog will appear. Select the name of the stitch and then click Edit. When creating decorative stitches, start and stop on the Stitch Line. Do not end in the same place that you began the stitch. The actual Created Stitch Length is determined by the width between the first and last input points. Where your last input point is, the next stitch will begin Rev. A Digitizing

180 166 Digitizing Manual and Walk Stitches To select the stitch by viewing an image of it, click the Stitch View/ Select button. You will get a pop-up screen with an image of all your decorative stitches along with the name of each and the date and time created. Select the one that you would like to edit by clicking on it and then click OK. Click OK. You will now see the name of the stitch that you just selected in the Edit Decorative Stitches pop-up dialog. Click the Edit button. This will open the window that allows you to edit the decorative stitch (it is the same window used for creating decorative stitches). DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

181 Digitizing Column Stitches 167 While editing a decorative stitch, always keep in mind that the Created Stitch Length is proportional to the size that you first saved. Digitizing Column Stitches This section explains how to digitize columns in DesignShop. The column types discussed are Column 1, Column 2, Singleline, and Complex Column. (Available in DesignShop and higher product levels). Column 1 Column 1 is used to generate parallel columns. The stitches are generated back and forth between two outside lines that are parallel (or nearly parallel) to each other. You can access the Column 1 input method by clicking the toolbar For tutorials on digitizing column stitches, see pg. 303 button, selecting Insert->Column 1, or by right-clicking in the View Window and selecting Column 1 from the pop-up menu. Columns are usually digitized with satin stitches. However, other stitch types are available: Zigzag, E stitch, or Fill. NOTE: (In general, Zigzags can be used for underlays and borders around lettering. Use Column 1, 2 or Singleline input tools to digitize a Zigzag. E stitch's can be used for applique tackdowns or border stitching. Use Column 1, 2 or Singleline Input tools to digitize an E stitch.) You can change the stitch type and other column properties in the Column Properties dialog. You can change these properties before you begin digitizing a Column 1 by right-clicking the Column 1 toolbar button and adjusting the element properties. NOTE: When you select the Column 1 tool, notice that the four column stitch types become available in the input toolbar (Satin, ; Zigzag, ; E-Stitch., Fill ). Left-click a stitch type toolbar button to digitize with that stitch type Rev. A Digitizing

182 168 Digitizing Column Stitches You can also edit the properties of existing columns at the design, project, and element level. See Column Tab, pg. 69, for a description of column properties. You can always refer to the status line below the View Window to give direction for the next step while digitizing an element. The following are some guidelines for digitizing columns: The left-click on the mouse is used to insert a straight input point. A triangle represents each straight point. The right mouse button is used to insert a curved input point. A circle represents each curved point. Always start with the left-click. If the shape is curved, in some cases you will need to alternate between left click and right clicks. Notice the wireframe outlines that form on the screen as you digitize. If they cross, they will show an X and you will get a bow tie effect of the stitching. Pressing and holding the ALT key on your keyboard will allow you to input a perfectly straight line. Lines can be horizontal, vertical, or angled (in increments of the constrained line input, see pg. 45). If you make a mistake or click too many points, simply press the BACKSPACE key on the keyboard to delete the last input point. Each time the BACKSPACE key is pressed, the input points will be deleted in sequence. Normally, the exit point of a column is determined by the last digitized point of the column. The exit point can be placed on the opposite side of the last digitized point at digitize time by holding down the CTRL key while pressing the ENTER key to end the column. As an example, the simplest representation of a shape that would lend itself to a Column 1 stitching is the letter l. You would follow the instructions below to digitize the letter l. 1. Input your first point by left-clicking in the View Window; this will input a straight point. 2. Now input the second point parallel to the first input point. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

183 Digitizing Column Stitches Input the third point on the same side of the column as your first input point. 4. Input the fourth point parallel to the third point. (These steps are illustrated below.) Now press the ENTER key to complete your wireframe column and generate stitches. This is the simplest type of column. You can also use a Column 1 stitch to digitize a curved shape, such as the letter c. You would follow the instructions below to digitize this letter: 1. Input your first straight point (by left-clicking). 2. Input your second straight point parallel to the first point (leftclick). 3. Input the third point halfway around the c on the same side of the column as your first input point, this point will be a curved point that you input by right-clicking. 4. Input another curved point (right-click) on the opposite side of the column, parallel to the third point. 5. Input the fifth point at the end of the c on the same side of the column as the first and third. This will be a straight point that you will input by left-clicking Rev. A Digitizing

184 170 Digitizing Column Stitches 6. Input the final point on the opposite side of the column, parallel to the fifth point. This will be another straight point that you will get by left-clicking. The wireframe displays where the stitches will be placed. Press the ENTER key when you are finished. This example is illustrated below. Column 2 Column 2 is used more often to generate column stitches for nonparallel columns. You can access the Column 2 input method by clicking the toolbar button, selecting Insert->Column 2, or by right-clicking in the View Window and selecting Column 2 from the pop-up menu. For some guidelines on digitizing columns, see pg Columns are usually digitized with satin stitches. However, other stitch types are available: Zigzag, E stitch, or Fill. You can change the stitch type and other column properties in the Column Properties dialog. You can change these properties before you begin digitizing a Column 2 by right-clicking the Column 2 toolbar button and adjusting the element properties. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

185 Digitizing Column Stitches 171 NOTE: When you select the Column 2 tool, notice that the four column stitch types become available in the input toolbar. (Satin, ; Zigzag, ; E-Stitch., Fill ). Leftclick a stitch type toolbar button to digitize with that stitch type. You can also edit the properties of existing columns at the design, project, and element level. See Column Tab, pg. 69 for a description of column properties. To use the Column 2 input method: 1. Digitize all of the outline stitches from the beginning on one side of an element (using straight and curved points as needed). Remember to start with a straight point. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Digitize from the beginning again on the other side of the element (using straight and curved points as needed). In the same graphic that was used for the above columns, there is a stem of a flower. It would be a good idea to think about the sewing order of things before beginning this column. While you are digitizing, you can change your current input element to the previous element type by pressing P on your keyboard after entering the stitches. In this example, you would probably want to sew the flower stem from the bottom up so that you can go into the next element more easily. Left-click to input straight points, right-click to input curved points Rev. A Digitizing

186 172 Digitizing Column Stitches 1 - straight 2 - curved 3 - straight 4 - curved 5 - straight 6 - straight 7 - straight 8 - curved 9 - straight ENTER 10 - straight 11 - curved 12 - straight 13 - curved 14 - straight 15 - straight 16 - curved 17 - straight ENTER Singleline Singleline is a method of producing columns that maintain an equal width throughout the column. Single line center, singleline left, and single line right are the three different types of single line input. The difference between these three types is the positioning of the stitch area surrounding the line that you create (i.e., in singleline right columns the stitching is positioned to the right of the centerline, in singleline left columns the stitching is positioned to the left of the centerline). You can find each of these three functions in three locations: the toolbar button, under the Insert Menu, or by right-clicking in the View Window. Columns are usually digitized with satin stitches. However, other stitch types are available: Zigzag, E stitch, or Fill. You can change the stitch type and other column properties in the Column Properties DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

187 Digitizing Column Stitches 173 dialog. You can change these properties before you begin digitizing a Singleline by right-clicking any of the Singleline toolbar buttons and adjusting the element properties. NOTE: When you select any of the singleline tools, notice that the four column stitch types become available in the input toolbar. (Satin, ; Zigzag, ; E-Stitch., Fill ) Leftclick a stitch type toolbar button to digitize with that stitch type. You can also use Auto Shape tools when digitizing singlelines (see pg. 203). You can also edit the properties of existing columns at the design, project, and element level. See Column Tab, pg. 69, and Singleline Tab, pg. 76 for a description of column properties. When creating a Singleline center column you will first digitize the basic wireframe outline of the design. Then following the instructions located in the gray area below the View Window (the status line), input the first and second width points. The distance between these two points will determine the width of your column with your wireframe line in the center. Singleline automatically terminates after inputting the width of the second point. This is the same procedure used to input a Singleline left and a Singleline right. You would follow the steps below to digitize a singleline column using straight points. You could use any of the singleline tools in this example: 1. Input your first point by left-clicking in the View Window, which will input a straight point. 2. Input a second straight point (left-click). Click the ENTER key to complete the singleline. 3. Now you have to determine the width of the column that you are digitizing. Left click to enter the first width point Rev. A Digitizing

188 174 Digitizing Column Stitches 4. Move your cursor from the first point to the desired width and left click again to insert the second width point. This example is illustrated below. For this example, it didn't matter where the width points were placed, but if you are digitizing over a graphic (and need to be precise) you may want to place your width points over the graphic. You would follow the steps below to digitize a singleline column using straight and curved points. You could use any of the singleline tools in this example of digitizing a circle: 1. Input your first point by left-clicking in the View Window; this will input a straight point. 2. Input a curved point 1/4 of the way around the circle by rightclicking. 3. Input a straight point 1/2 of the way around the circle by leftclicking. 4. Input a curved point 3/4 of the way around the circle with a rightclick. 5. Input the final point slightly past the first point to ensure that the stitches meet up when sewn out. The final point should be a DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

189 Digitizing Column Stitches 175 straight point that you get by left-clicking. When the wireframe outline is completed, click the ENTER key. 6. Now enter the first width point by left-clicking. Determine the desired width and place your cursor that distance from the first width point and left click to enter another width point. This example is illustrated below. Complex Column (Available in DesignShop and higher product levels). The complex column tool provides another option for digitizing columns. You can access the Complex Column tool by clicking the toolbar button, selecting Insert->Complex Column, or by right-clicking in the View Window and selecting Complex Column from the pop-up menu. For some guidelines on digitizing columns, see pg Complex Columns are usually digitized with satin stitches. However, other stitch types are available: Zigzag, E stitch, or Fill. You can change the stitch type and other column properties in the Column You can always refer to the status line below the View Window to give direction for the next step while digitizing an element Rev. A Digitizing

190 176 Digitizing Column Stitches Properties dialog. You can change these properties before you begin digitizing a Column 2 by right-clicking the Complex Column toolbar button and adjusting the element properties. NOTE: When you select the Complex Column tool, notice that the four column stitch types become available in the input toolbar. (Satin, ; Zigzag, ; E-Stitch., Fill ) Left-click a stitch type toolbar button to digitize with that stitch type. You can also use Auto Shape tools when digitizing complex columns (see pg. 203). You can also edit the properties of existing columns at the design, project, and element level. See Column Tab, pg. 69 for a description of column properties. To digitize a complex column: 1. Select the complex column tool. 2. Input the wireframe outline of the complex column by inputting straight (left-clicking) or curved (right-clicking) points. (The last point input should be close to the first point that you input). 3. Press ENTER on your keyboard. This will connect the last point with the first point. 4. If there are any small holes or places that you do not want the complex column to cover, digitize a wireframe outline around those just as you did the first outline and press ENTER after each one. After you have finished digitizing the complex column and any holes, press ENTER again. 5. Input the complex column entry point with a left-click. The entry point is where you would like the stitches to begin on the complex column. 6. Input the complex column exit point with a left-click. The exit point is where you would like the stitches to tie off and end the complex column. 7. The stitches will now be generated in the complex column. Column Effects (Available in the DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro + product DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

191 Digitizing Column Stitches 177 levels). You can access column effects by clicking the Effects button in the Column properties tab. You can adjust column effects before you begin digitizing, or you can change them on existing columns. There are four effects that can be applied when digitizing columns: Capped Corners, Mitered Corners, Random Edge and Custom Density. Corners Capped and Mitered Cornering are for Singleline and Column1 type columns. These two methods of stitching around corners give DesignShop the ability to drastically change its direction of stitching without taking anything away from the stitch quality or appearance. These effects are available on the Corners tab. (See image below). Mitered Corners can be described as two columns with slanted edges that match up or blend together at the corner (imagine how a corner comes together on a picture frame; this is what the stitches will look like on a Mitered Corner when it is sewn out). By inserting a degree value (75 degrees for example) for Mitered Corners, you are telling DesignShop that you want the corners of Singleline or Column 1 columns to have Mitered Corners once the angle is 75 degrees or Rev. A Digitizing

192 178 Digitizing Column Stitches smaller. Refer to the example below to better understand the angle value. You also have the ability to determine how much the overlap should be when the two edges of a Mitered Corner meet (20 points is an example). Refer to the example below to visualize the overlap of a Mitered Corner. The following example has a very loose density and exaggerated overlay values on the stitches view for better visualization. The highlighted area illustrates the overlay area. Capped Corners look like there is a "cap" over the area where two columns meet at a point. By inserting a degree value (45 degrees for example) for Capped Corners, you are telling DesignShop that you want the corners of singleline or column 1 columns to have Capped Corners once the angle is 45 degrees or smaller. You also have the ability to determine how much the overlap should be (3 points for example). Refer to the example below to visualize the overlap of a Capped Corner. The following example has a very loose density and exaggerated overlay values on the stitches view for better visualization. The highlighted area illustrates the overlay area. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

193 Digitizing Column Stitches 179 Automatic Smooth Cornering is for Singleline and Column 1 type columns. This involves automatically inserting pairs of straight points on each corner edge to allow for smoother stitching around the corner. Automatically inserted points may be converted to wireframe points by right-clicking on the element and selecting Convert Corners to Wireframe. You have full control over this feature via the Column Effects property page, which gives you the ability to toggle each feature. You can also control on which angles capping and mitering will occur, allowing one method to take precedence over the other. Column 1 and Singleline corners only have the ability to be capped and/or mitered if a pair of straight points binds them. A mismatch of points (i.e., a straight point on the inside edge and a curved point on the outside edge or vice versa) or a pair of curved points will result in our current standard method of cornering being applied. For automatic smooth cornering to occur the corner must be bound by straight points and must have straight edges. You can have multiple types of corners turned on and set for different degrees of angles. Random Edge Random Edge is very useful in embroidery to create the effects of shading, the look of hair, grass, and many other possibilities. This effect is available on the Effects tab. (See the following image) Rev. A Digitizing

194 180 Digitizing Column Stitches Random Edge allows you to specify a column edge stitch length variance. This means one or both sides of a column are randomly zigzagged in and out instead of the usual even column edge. This effect can be applied to side one, side two or both column sides. Random Edge applies to all of the following column stitch types: Satin Stitch, Fill, E Stitch, and ZigZag. When applying Random Edge to a column, select Edge One, Edge Two, or Both edges. Next select the width percentage from 0 to 100%. The width percentage represents the range of variation of column line width. Note that the Random Edge Data cannot be saved as part of a condensed file. Below is an example of Random Edge. In this example, the rays of sun have random edge on both sides with a width variation of 25%. Custom Density Custom Density allows you to specify variable density. This is often DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

195 Digitizing Column Stitches 181 used for color blending. This will apply to all of the following column stitch types: Satin Stitch, Fill, E Stitch, and ZigZag. NOTE: Custom Density Data cannot be saved as part of a condensed file. Like Random Edge, Custom Density is available on the Effects property tab. (See image below). p To specify this variable density, first enter the minimum and maximum density values. These values will be displayed on the y axis. After entering the density range, select the type of variation you want to use. The following types are available: Linear Increasing: Density increases linearly as the element is sewn (i.e., density increases gradually from the beginning to the end of the column). Convex: Density increases, then decreases as the element is sewn. Exponential: Density increases exponentially as the element is sewn. Wave Increasing: Density alternates between increasing and decreasing as the element is sewn Rev. A Digitizing

196 182 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches Clicking in the Invert checkbox reverses the types of density variation. Therefore, when the Invert box is checked: Linear Increasing shows Linear Decreasing Convex shows Concave Exponential Increasing shows Exponential Decreasing Wave Increasing shows Wave Decreasing You can adjust the variation types by moving the density points displayed in the Custom Density graph. To move an existing density point, select it, then drag it to the desired location. When you have a point selected, its location (in the element) and density will be displayed next to Current Point. For example, Current Point: Length 50% Density pt. means that the selected point is in the middle of the element (element has been sewn halfway) and the density at that point is 7.4. NOTE: You will not be allowed to make adjustments that are not consistent with the variation type. You can also add points by left-clicking to add straight points and right-clicking to add curved points. NOTE: Whenever you make a change to a variation type, the changes will be saved as Custom variation type (this will be displayed in the pull-down menu). You can only have one Custom type at a time (that is, every time you create a new custom type, the previous custom type is overwritten). Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches (Available in DesignShop and higher product levels). This section explains how to digitize fills in DesignShop. The complex fill types discussed in this section are Standard and Pattern. You can also digitize with Satin Stitch and Decorative Stitch fills. Please see pg. 85 for information on Satin Fills and pg. 86 for information on Decorative Stitch fills. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

197 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches 183 Complex fill To digitize a complex fill, select the complex fill tool by left-clicking it in the toolbar, by selecting Insert->Complex, or by right-clicking inside the View Window and selecting Complex from the pop-up menu. You can change complex fill properties such as stitch type in the Fill Properties dialog. You can change these properties before you begin digitizing a complex fill by right-clicking the Complex Fill toolbar button and adjusting the element properties. NOTE: When you select the complex fill tool, notice that the four fill stitch types (Standard ; Pattern ; Satin ; and Decorative Stitch ) become available in the input toolbar. Left-click a stitch type toolbar button to digitize with that stitch type. You can also use Auto Shape tools when digitizing complex fills (see pg. 203). You can also edit the properties of existing complex fills at the design, project, and element level. See Fill Tab, pg. 76, for a description of fill properties. Also see Pattern Fills, pg. 82, Standard Fills, pg. 77, and Decorative Fills, pg. 86. Follow the below procedure to digitize a complex fill. Remember that the gray area directly below the design contains instructions to guide you through the steps. 1. Select the complex fill tool. 2. Input the wireframe outline of the complex fill by inputting straight (left-clicking) or curved (right-clicking) points. (The last point input should end up being close to the first point that you input). 3. Press ENTER on your keyboard. This will connect the last point with the first point. 4. If there are any small holes or places that you do not want the fill to cover, digitize a wireframe outline around those just as you did the first outline and press ENTER after each one. After you have Rev. A Digitizing

198 184 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches finished digitizing the complex fill and any holes, press ENTER again. 5. Input the complex fill entry point with a left-click. The entry point is where you would like the stitches to begin on the complex fill. 6. Input the complex fill exit point with a left-click. The exit point is where you would like the stitches to tie off and end the complex fill. 7. Input the first direction point with a left-click. 8. Input the second direction point with a left-click. The direction of the line between the two direction points determines the direction of the fill stitches on the complex fill just digitized. The direction points can be anywhere in the View Window (inside or outside of the complex fill). 9. The stitches will now be generated in the complex fill. Complex fill automatically terminates after the second direction point is put in. If a point is entered incorrectly, pressing the BACKSPACE key will remove the input points in reverse order. Pressing ESC at any point during digitizing will cancel the entire element. You can always refer to the status line below the View Window to give direction for the next step while digitizing an element. Complex fill hole If you have finished a complex fill and decide later that it should contain some empty spaces (holes), you can insert them without having to digitize the fill again. The toolbar button next to the complex fill button (with the black outline and the filled in hole) is the Complex Hole button. NOTE: You can also use Auto Shape tools to digitize complex fill holes (see pg. 203). To digitize a complex hole: 1. Select the complex fill you want to change by left-clicking inside of it. Remember that you can determine if an element is selected if it has a box around it and its wireframe points are shown. 2. Select the complex hole tool. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

199 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches Now digitize the wireframe outline of the hole (following the same procedure as a complex fill). 4. When finished, press ENTER. Standard Fills There are 16 pre-defined fills containing from 1 to 8 partitions in various combinations of fill parameters. For more information on standard fill properties, see pg. 77. For tutorials on inputting a complex fill and a complex fill hole, see pg. 309 To use the pre-defined standard fills 1. Right-click on the complex fill element on the Input toolbar. 2. Under Stitch Type, choose Standard. 3. Select the Standard fill from the drop-down menu. 4. Click OK. 5. Digitize the outline of the shape using the complex fill digitizing rules. (See Digitizing Complex Fills, pg. 182). Creating Standard Fills There are many factors that may be manipulated to form various looks in fill stitching. You can change these factors to create your own standard fill Rev. A Digitizing

200 186 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches These factors are stitch density, stitch length, partition lines, partition line sequences, and partition line angles. Stitch density: how many embroidery points there are between rows of stitches (example: 4.2 points). The image on the next page displays stitch density. Stitch length: the distance set for maximum length between needle penetrations. The image on the next page displays stitch length. Number of Partition Lines: Partition lines is a mathematical term, and the lines are seen only by the computer. The partition lines are used to determine where the needle will penetrate on each stitch line. Partition lines are numbered beginning with 0; you can enter up to 8 partitions in this field. Each row of stitching consists of needle penetrations made from one partition line. The number of rows in a partition line set always equals the number of partition lines. In the example below, the number of partition lines is 2; therefore 2 rows of stitching make up the partition lineset. The two partition lines in the illustration are numbered 0 and 1. In the 1st stitch line, the needle penetrates at the intersection of the stitch line and partition line 0. In the 2nd stitch line, the needle penetrates at the intersection of the stitch line and partition line 1. The needle repeats this sequence each 2 stitch lines. The partition line sequence is 0,1,0,1,0,1, etc. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

201 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches st stitch line 2nd stitch line density etc... stitch length Partition Line Sequence: If you look closely at the finished fills, you will be able to distinguish a visual pattern. You can vary this pattern by changing the stitch length and density, and by changing the angle of the partition lines; but going one step further, you can change the sequence of the partition order, i.e., 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. For example, you could change the sequence in the previous example to 1,0,1,0, etc. NOTE: When you create your own partition sequence, if you include a number that is higher than the number of partition lines, that number will be ignored. For example, if you choose 6 for the number of partitions, a 7 in the partition sequence would be ignored. Partition Line Angle: The angle made by the intersection of any given partition line with the line of stitching in a fill pattern. The angle is measured in a counter-clockwise rotation from the left end of the line of stitching. The angle can be any number between 1 degree and 179 degrees. In the example below, the partition line angle is 45 degrees, because each stitch point of the partition lines up at an offset that makes a Rev. A Digitizing

202 188 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches degree angle when a line is drawn through each stitch point of the partition line Pattern Fill (Available in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro +). Pattern Fill is a custom stitch type used in digitizing complex fills. It is used for large areas to obtain artistic effects in designs. The fill stitching in a pattern fill is a satin stitch with needle penetrations forming the chosen pattern. You can choose from several of the standard pattern fills included with DesignShop or create your own using Create Pattern Fill. Pattern fills are saved in a custom file named CustomFactory.cff. If you have upgraded an existing DesignShop system to DesignShop 2004, you will need to complete the following steps to insert the new custom file and access the new standard pattern fills. 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Select File->New. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

203 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches Select Custom->Insert Custom File. 4. Navigate to the DesignShop installation directory (the default is C:\Program Files\Melco Embroidery Systems\Design Shop) 5. Select the file CustomFactory2004.cff. 6. Click OK. You will now be able to access the new standard pattern fills. To use the standard pattern fills The following standard pattern fills are available: Macaroni Bricks Diamond Caret Diamond Curve Weave Diamond Simple Diamond Straight Weave Raindrops Stars Vertical Scales Waffle Weave 1. Right-click the complex fill element on the Input toolbar. 2. Under Stitch Type, choose Pattern. 3. Select the Pattern from the drop-down menu. 4. Click OK. 5. Digitize the outline of the shape using the complex fill digitizing rules. (See Digitizing Complex Fills, pg. 182). Creating Pattern Fills 1. To create a pattern fill, select Custom->Create Pattern Fill. A screen will pop up to allow you to create the pattern fill Rev. A Digitizing

204 190 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches 2. Zoom in if needed and turn on the grid to be more exact. 3. Select the element that you would like to digitize with (walk or manual stitch). Follow the basic digitizing rules. In the following Small Diamond pattern fill example, the steps are labeled in the image: DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

205 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches 191 Steps 1-5: Digitize a diamond shape with leftclicks. ENTER Steps 6-10: Digitize a diamond shape with leftclicks. ENTER Once you are finished creating your pattern fill, you can name it and save it. If saved, it will be added to the pattern fill list that you can choose from within the Fill property page. Default Settings Created Width displays the horizontal width at which pattern fill was created. Created Height displays the vertical height at which the pattern fill was created. Default Density allows you to change the default density of the pattern fill. Test Settings Width will change the horizontal width of the pattern fill. Height will change the vertical height of the pattern fill Rev. A Digitizing

206 192 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches Remember that when changing test settings you can always refer back to the created width and height to see the first saved settings. Editing Pattern Fills To edit pattern fills go to the Custom->Edit Pattern Fills. A pop-up dialog will appear. Select the name of the fill and click Edit. NOTE: You can also delete pattern fills from your hard drive using the dialog displayed below. To select the Fill by viewing it, click the Pattern View/Select button to view the following dialog. Click OK. You will now see the name of the fill that you just selected DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

207 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches 193 in the Edit Pattern Fill pop-up dialog. Click the Edit button. When you edit pattern fills using Custom->Edit Pattern Fills, the changes will be saved as a new version of the pattern fill on your hard drive. For example, if you edit the pattern fill named Bricks, then click OK, you will be asked if you want to delete the old file. If you say yes, the old file will be deleted. If you say yes, you will have more than one file named Bricks on your computer. However, these fill names contain date and time stamps. If any of the documents you have open contain pattern fills, you will be asked if you want to apply the new changes to the existing pattern fills. NOTE: You can also change pattern fill properties in the Fill Properties dialog. You can change these properties before you begin digitizing a complex fill by right-clicking the Complex Fill toolbar button and adjusting the element properties. You can also edit the properties of existing complex fills at the design, project, and element level. Any editing you perform using this method does not affect the pattern fill files saved on your computer. Fill Effects This section describes the effects available for fills: random edge, distortion effects, and custom density. These effects can be accessed by clicking the Effects button on the Fill Properties page. Random Edge (Available in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro +) Random Edge is very useful in embroidery to create the effects of shading, the look of hair and many other possibilities. Random Edge is available on the Effects tab. (See the following image) Rev. A Digitizing

208 194 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches Random Edge allows the user to specify a fill edge stitch length variance. This means one or both sides of a fill are randomly zigzagged in and out instead of the usual even fill edge. This effect can be applied to side one, side two or both fill sides. Random Edge applies to all of the following fill stitch types: Pattern, Standard, Satin, and Decorative. When applying Random Edge to a fill, select Edge One, Edge Two, or Both edges. Next select the width percentage from 0 to 100%. The width percentage represents the range of variation width. NOTE: The Random Edge Data cannot be saved as part of a condensed file. The following image displays an example of Random Edge used with a fill: DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

209 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches 195 Wave Fills (Available in DesignShop Pro +) The wave fill function allows you to create a curved stitch direction line, producing a stitch direction with one or more curves. To create a wave fill: 1. Select a complex fill. 2. Position the mouse over the center of the stitch direction line. 3. Input one or more straight (left-click) or curved (right-click) points. 4. Select a point on the stitch direction line and move it to the desired location. The stitch direction will reflect the changes to the stitch direction line. For tutorials on distortion fills, see pg You can also change the length of the stitch direction line, which will alter the repetition of the waved effect (i.e., if the stitch direction line is shorter than the width of the fill, the waved effect will repeat). Double Wave Fills (Available in DesignShop Pro +) Double wave fills are similar to wave fills, in that double wave fills can have a curved stitch direction line. The difference between the two types of effects is that double wave fills have two stitch direction lines. Because double wave fills have two stitch direction lines, there can be two variations of the curved stitch direction. To create a double wave fill: 1. Double-click a complex fill to displays its properties page. 2. Click the Effects button, which will take you to the Effects tab. 3. Under Distortion Effects, select Double Waved from the pulldown menu. 4. Click OK on the Effects tab. 5. Click OK to close the properties dialog. 6. You will now see a box around the complex fill, in addition to the selection box. The two blue lines are the stitch direction lines. (In the image below, the stitch direction lines are the lines that have the entry and exit points on them) Rev. A Digitizing

210 196 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches 7. You can now add straight or curved points to the stitch direction lines. You can then move the points around to create curved effects. You can also shorten or lengthen the stitch direction lines. The image below displays a complex fill with a double wave fill effect. NOTE: The stitch direction lines can intercept the fill, but if the lines connecting the stitch direction lines intercept the fill, the fill will not sew properly. Vantage Fill (Available in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro +). DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

211 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches 197 This fill effect allows you to apply visual perspective to complex fills (e.g., you may want the top of a fill to appear like it is farther away than the bottom of a fill). NOTE: This fill effect works best with decorative fills. To create a perspective effect: 1. Double-click a complex fill to displays its properties page. 2. Click the Effects button, which will take you to the Effects tab. (You can also press CTRL+ENTER after you have selected a complex fill to display the Effects dialog). 3. Under Distortion Effects, select Vantage Fill from the pulldown menu. 4. Click OK on the Effects tab. 5. Click OK to close the properties dialog. 6. You will now see a box around the complex fill, in addition to the selection box. The two blue lines are the stitch direction lines. (In the image below, the stitch direction lines are the horizontal lines). 7. You can now create the perspective effect. Resize one edge of the effect box (by selecting and dragging the corners) to make it shorter than the opposite edge. Notice that the stitches gradually become smaller from the longer to the shorter edge. This creates the perspective effect that makes it appear that the smaller Rev. A Digitizing

212 198 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches stitches are farther away. (See the image below and compare to the image above.) As with wave fills, pg. 195, you can add points to the stitch direction lines to create curved stitch directions. NOTE: The stitch direction lines can intercept the fill, but if the lines connecting the stitch direction lines intercept the fill, the fill will not sew properly. Radial Out (Available in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro +). This fill effect creates the appearance of a three-dimensional globe within a complex fill. NOTE: This fill effect works best with decorative fills. 1. Double-click a complex fill to displays its properties page. 2. Click the Effects button, which will take you to the Effects tab. (You can also press CTRL+ENTER after you have selected a complex fill to display the Effects dialog). 3. Under Distortion Effects, select Radial Out from the pull-down menu. 4. Click OK on the Effects tab. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

213 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches Click OK to close the properties dialog. 6. You will now see a circle around the complex fill, in addition to the selection box. You will also see a line that starts in the center of the circle and extends to the edge of the circle. (See image below). 7. The point in the center of the circle is the Globe Center. You can select this point and drag to change the location of the center of the globe. The point at the edge of the marks the radius of the globe. You can select this point and drag it to increase or decrease the radius of the circle. Notice the difference between the two following fills. The image on the left is a fill with no effect, and the image on the right displays the Radial Out effect. The quickest way to select the center and radius points is to select them from the Project Tree View Rev. A Digitizing

214 200 Digitizing Complex Fill Stitches Radial In (Available in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro +). This fill effect creates the appearance of a three-dimensional inward globe within a complex fill. NOTE: This fill effect works best with decorative fills. 1. Double-click a complex fill to displays its properties page. 2. Click the Effects button, which will take you to the Effects tab. (You can also press CTRL+ENTER after you have selected a complex fill to display the Effects dialog). 3. Under Distortion Effects, select Radial In from the pull-down menu. 4. Click OK on the Effects tab, then click OK to close the properties dialog. 5. You will now see a circle around the complex fill, in addition to the selection box. You will also see a line that starts in the center of the circle and extends to the edge of the circle. As in the Radial Out effect, the point in the center of the circle is the Globe Center. You can select this point and drag to change the location of the center of the globe. The point at the edge of the marks the radius of the globe. You can select this point and drag it to increase or decrease the radius of the circle. (See Radial Out, pg. 198). The Radial In effect looks like this: DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

215 Additional Digitizing Tools 201 Custom Density Custom Density allows you to specify variable density. This is often used for color blending. This will apply to all of the following fill stitch types: Pattern, Standard, Satin, and Decorative. NOTE: Custom Density Data cannot be saved as part of a condensed file. Custom Density is available on the Effects tab. Custom Density is described in detail in Digitizing Columns. (See pg. 180) Additional Digitizing Tools While digitizing, you can insert the following commands: color change, trim, and return to origin. Color Change A color change is an instruction to the peripheral to pause for a rethread on a single-needle machine, or to change to a different needle on a multi-needle machine. It also changes the color in the View Window to the next color in the color palette. This function also inserts a color change command after the currently highlighted data-set in the stitch list (in the Project Tree View). To insert a color change, left-click on an item (e.g., an element) to highlight it. Then insert a color change by doing one of the following: clicking the Color Change shortcut button, selecting Insert->Color Change, or right-clicking in the View Window and selecting Color Change from the pop-up menu. You could also use the keyboard shortcut: F6 (but only with lettering). To delete a color change, simply left-click the color change and press the DELETE key on your keyboard (or right-click the selected color change and select Delete from the pop-up menu). You can also move a color change by left-clicking the color change in the Project Tree View, holding down the left mouse button, and dragging the color change to the desired location Rev. A Digitizing

216 202 Additional Digitizing Tools Trim A trim command causes peripherals equipped with trimmers to perform a trim. This function also inserts a trim command after the currently highlighted data-set in the stitch list. To insert a trim, left-click on an item (e.g., an element) in the Project View to highlight it. Then insert a trim by doing one of the following: clicking the trim shortcut button, selecting Insert->Trim, or right-clicking in the View Window and selecting Trim from the pop-up menu. To delete a trim, simply left-click the trim and press the DELETE key on your keyboard (or right-click the selected trim and select Delete from the pop-up menu). You can also move a trim by left-clicking the color change in the Project Tree View, holding down the left mouse button, and dragging the trim to the desired location. Return to Origin This function is normally used at the end of the digitizing process to tell the embroidery peripheral to return the needle to the design origin. It is most helpful to you and your customers to start and end a design at the exact center of the design. You generally want to have lock stitches at the end of a design, trim, then return to origin. In the Project Properties tab, you will see a Return to Origin setting. The default for this setting is On. This means that a Return to Origin will be automatically inserted into every design you save. Should you need to insert a Return to Origin, click the shortcut button, or select Insert->Return to Origin. Set Insert Here To use Set Insert Here, go to the desired location in the Project View, right-click, then select Set Insert Here. Whatever you create next will be added in the desired location. If you use Set Insert Here in the Project View, then the new items will be inserted at that location. This is especially useful when you want all of your borders to be at the end. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

217 Custom Files 203 Custom Files Decorative stitches and pattern fills are saved in a custom file named CustomFactory.cff. If you have upgraded an existing DesignShop system to DesignShop 2004, you will need to complete the following steps to insert the new custom file and access the new pattern fills and decorative stitches. 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Select File->New. 3. Select Custom->Insert Custom File. 4. Navigate to the DesignShop installation directory (the default is C:\Program Files\Melco Embroidery Systems\Design Shop) 5. Select the file CustomFactory2004.cff. 6. Click OK. You will now be able to access the new pattern fills and decorative stitches. Auto Shapes (Available in DesignShop and higher product levels) This feature allows you to insert one or more of the following shapes into a design: circle, ellipse, square, rectangle and star. Each shape may be inserted as a walk stitch, bean stitch, decorative stitch, singleline center, singleline left, singleline right and complex fill. To insert a shape, you must first select the desired stitch type (e.g., decorative stitch), then select the shape (e.g., ellipse) from the input toolbar. Now, click the mouse once, then move the mouse and click again, the selected shape will appear with the selected stitch type (Note: this is not a click and drag operation). See the following tables for the characteristics of shape and stitch type. One typical use for auto shapes is to create outlines around designs. Try this using decorative stitch for an interesting effect Rev. A Digitizing

218 204 Auto Shapes Stitch Types: Walk, Bean, Decorative: Center Point Anchor Point Entry Point Exit Point Circle 1st Click N/A 2nd Click 2nd Click Ellipse N/A 1st Click 0 Degrees 0 Degrees Square N/A 1st Click Top Center Top Center Rectangle N/A 1st Click Top Center Top Center Star 1st Click N/A Bottom Right Point of Top point of Star Star Stitch Types: Singleline Center/Left/Right: Center Point Anchor Point Stitch Types: Complex Fill: Entry Point Exit Point Width Circle 1st Click N/A 2nd Click 2nd Click 20 points Ellipse N/A 1st Click 0 Degrees 0 Degrees 20 points Square N/A 1st Click Top Center Top Center 20 points Rectangle N/A 1st Click Top Center Top Center 20 points Star 1st Click N/A Center Point Circle 1st Click N/A Anchor Point 1/2 way down on the right from the top point of the star 1/2 way down on the right from the top point of the star Entry Point Exit Point -90 degrees from 2nd Click 90 degrees from 2nd Click 20 points Width Drag line Ellipse N/A 1st Click 2nd Click 2nd Click Drag line Square N/A 1st Click 1st Click 2nd Click Horizontal Rectangle N/A 1st Click 1st Click 2nd Click Horizontal Star 1st Click N/A Top point of star Bottom right point of star Horizontal DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

219 6. DESIGNSHOP TOOLS IN THIS CHAPTER: Embroidery Network System Design Database Icon Generator Accelerator Editor Business Assistant Convert / Restore Alphabets Design Filter Proximity Filter Hoop Manager Tablet Digitizer Security Step and Repeat Batch Converter Rev. A Melco Embroidery Systems

220 206 Embroidery Network System Embroidery Network System (Available with DesignShop and higher product levels). Embroidery Network System (ENS) is a Windows 95/98 32 bit program that allows the remote control and monitoring of EMB, EMT, and EMC type embroidery machines. Sending a design to the peripheral When you have a design open in DesignShop and you are ready to sew the design, complete the following steps: 1. Click the ENS toolbar button or select Embroidery Network System from the File Menu. 2. In ENS, make sure you have the Transfer tab active (click on it if you do not). 3. Click the Send button in ENS. (Before you click the Send button you can make changes such as renaming the file, etc. See the ENS HTML Help System-click the Help button-for more information). When you want to send a design without opening it in DesignShop, you can use the following procedure. However, you can only do this with.exp and.asd files. 1. Open ENS. (You can open ENS directly or open it through DesignShop). 2. Make sure you have the Transfer tab active (click on it if you do not). 3. Select the desired machine(s) in the Peripheral List (along the left hand side of the screen); use the SHIFT or CTRL keys as you click the mouse button to select multiple peripherals. 4. Choose the drive and/or folder; click in the Look In field to do this. 5. Select the file(s) to be transferred; use the SHIFT or CTRL keys as you click the mouse button to select multiple files. 6. Once the desired file(s) are selected, click the Send button to send the design to the selected peripheral(s). OR DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

221 Design Database Make sure you have the Transfer tab active (click on it if you do not). 2. Choose the drive and/or folder; click in the Look In field to do this. 3. Select the file(s) to be transferred; use the SHIFT or CTRL keys as you click the mouse button to select multiple files. 4. Once the desired file(s) are selected, click and hold the left mouse button; move your cursor over the peripheral of your choice, and release the mouse button. This will send the file(s) to that peripheral. For further information about ENS, please refer to the Help System once you have opened ENS. Design Database (Available with DesignShop and higher product levels). The DesignShop Design Database application gives embroidery shops and digitizing houses the ability to enter Design-Customer information into a database. It allows you to categorize designs by subjects, enter and save customer information and link it to a design to form an order, and to find any document by any search conditions. For further information about the Design Database, please refer to the Help System once you have opened the Design Database. Icon Generator During installation a shortcut to the Icon Generator is added to the Windows Desktop. Double-clicking this shortcut will launch a small dialog application that uses, but is independent of, DesignShop. Icon Generator is separate from DesignShop because it may require a long time for it to complete its work. We did not want to keep you from using DesignShop during the time required to generate icons and update design properties for your designs. What is Icon Generator? Rev. A DesignShop Tools

222 208 Icon Generator DesignShop includes a Windows 'shell extension' that displays icons for embroidery files in Explorer, Find Files, and File Open, Save, and Save As dialogs within DesignShop. The icon files with extensions such as.cpf, and.epf, which we call shadow files, that were produced by EDS III will continue to be used by DesignShop when available. For designs that were not produced by EDS III, for example those purchased as a library, these shadow files must be generated. Icon Generator scans your hard disk(s) searching for embroidery files. It keeps counts of expanded, condensed, and project (OFM) files that need to have their icons and design properties generated or updated. This only needs to be done when you first install DesignShop and whenever you copy embroidery designs from diskettes or CD-ROM libraries of designs. DesignShop will function correctly without running Icon Generator but its integration with Windows will not be as tight from a visual perspective because the icons for some files may not be correctly displayed. It will be more difficult for you to locate the embroidery file you wish to open until Icon Generator has done its work. What if I have designs on multiple drives or network connections? You can easily create multiple Icon Generator shortcuts on your desktop, each with a different Target path root. Alternatively you might choose to change the Target path root within the shortcut whenever you wish to launch the Icon Generator. To set or change the Target path root on a shortcut to Icon Generator, simply rightbutton click on the shortcut, select Properties from the context menu, and on the Shortcut Tab note that Target is selected. Target is an edit field that is of the form path\ EdsShadow.exe Target Path. The Target Path in a normal install should be C:\ Designs and can be changed to any other path or network share. Normally this will not be needed if you have organized your system so that all designs are either in C:\ Designs or in sub-directories below that directory, e.g. C:\ Designs\ Birds or C:\ Designs\ JonesConstruction, because Icon Generator knows how to find designs in all sub-directories of the Target root. What will happen when I run Icon Generator? DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

223 Icon Generator 209 The visual behavior will be different depending on whether DesignShop is running when you double-click on the Icon Generator shortcut. If it is running, Icon Generator will find it and use DesignShop. If it is not running, Icon Generator will invisibly launch DesignShop and run it in the background. Note that if DesignShop is not installed on the same computer from which Icon Generator is run you will not be able to generate/update icons. The Icon Generator itself is a short, wide dialog that contains, initially, the DesignShop icon to the left of counts of files to update. Beneath that icon the Target root path will initially be displayed, and below that a progress indicator. Begin and Cancel buttons on the right are the only controls you will use to control Icon Generator. When you click Begin, the button will be relabeled Pause, and Icon Generator will begin searching for embroidery files in the Target path root and continue through all sub-directories. You can click Pause at any time; the button will be relabeled Resume and Icon Generator will discontinue its work until you click that button. Cancel allows you to dismiss Icon Generator completely. What happens if I cancel Icon Generator? If you cancel Icon Generator before it has completed its work then it will pick up where it left off when you run it again. Alternatively, you can click the Pause button if you need to work in DesignShop without the distraction of files being opened in your workspace, and then click Resume should you take a coffee break or go to lunch. There is almost no system resource cost to leaving Icon Generator launched but paused, so you can use it to generate and update icons at your convenience. How long will Icon Generator run? This all depends on the number of embroidery files that require icon generation/update. If all of your embroidery files were generated by EDS III it may take only a few seconds. If you have placed the entire Dakota Designs library on your hard disk and you have a slow computer it can require more than a day to complete its work. Progress will be indicated by the progress indicator and reduced counts of files but you should be aware that some files can take considerably longer than others to process Rev. A DesignShop Tools

224 210 Accelerator Editor What can go wrong... Two things can cause Icon Generator to fail. First, if it encounters non-embroidery files with extensions of EXP, CND, or OFM, a variety of failures can occur. The offending file can be read from the line that initially contained the Target root path so you can readily identify the source of the failure. In addition, a very small number of embroidery design errors cannot be correctly diagnosed in condensed files. This occurs fewer than three times in a thousand files among the more than fifteen thousand files used to test Icon Generator and DesignShop. Should you experience such a failure, note the name of the offending file and either remove it or rename it with a different file extension and restart Icon Generator. Accelerator Editor Accelerator Editor allows you to assign DesignShop functions to the hot key (or key combination) of your choice. To use this tool, select Tool->Accelerator Editor. You will see the following dialog: Commands: This list box contains a list of all of the available commands from the menus and toolbars. Current Keys: This list box displays the accelerators currently defined for the highlighted selection in the Commands box. The gray selections are default accelerators that cannot be removed or changed. The black accelerators are user-defined (defined by you), DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

225 Business Assistant 211 and can be removed or changed. NOTE: Default accelerators are displayed in gray, and user-defined accelerators are displayed in black. Select New Shortcut Key: This edit box allows you to enter in any key combination that you wish to be an accelerator/hot key for the highlighted selection in the Commands list box. Currently Affected To: Upon clicking the Assign button, if the key sequence in the Select New Shortcut Key box has already been defined for another command, that command text is displayed here. The Accelerator Manager prevents you from creating duplicate accelerators. Assign Button: This assigns the key sequence in the Select New Shortcut Key box to the highlighted selection in the Commands box. Pressing this button also saves the accelerator key sequence in your registry. Remove Button: This removes the highlighted selection in the Current Keys box from the list, as well as your registry. Reset All Button: This removes all of the accelerators that you have defined from the Current Keys box and the registry, and reloads the default accelerator table. How to use this tool: 1. Select Tool->Accelerator Editor to display the Accelerator editor dialog box. 2. Choose a command that you wish to add a hot key for and then click on it in the Commands box. 3. Now click in the Select New Shortcut Key box and type in the key sequence you want for the hot key. 4. Click Assign. 5. Click OK. Business Assistant (Available with DesignShop and higher product levels) Rev. A DesignShop Tools

226 212 Convert / Restore Alphabets The Business Assistant is a utility to help you calculate the cost on a per item basis. You can find the Business Assistant under the Tools menu. Below is a picture of the Business Assistant dialog. You may select the machine and hoop type. Values may be entered for a charge for each 1000 stitches and the maximum speed the design will be sewn at. You may also enter a price for any additional charges (for example a setup fee price). Click the Calculate button to see the total sewing time (hours:minutes:seconds) and total price. The Business Assistant supports all monetary values supported by the Window's regional settings. Estimates from the Business Assistant are not available for printing at this time. Convert / Restore Alphabets All alphabets currently being sold by Melco contain lock stitches at the end of each letter in the alphabet. These lock stitches are what "ties down" the stitching at the end of each letter. DesignShop allows you to add lock stitches to a lettering job from the Lock / Trim tab. However, because the lock stitches are already digitized into the alphabet, the result is multiple lock stitches that will create an undesirable knotting effect. To remove all existing lock stitches from all installed alphabets, select DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

227 Convert / Restore Alphabets 213 Tools->Convert Alphabets. This will display the following dialog box: When you click Continue, all lock stitches will be removed from the alphabets that are installed on your hard drive. If you want to stop click, Cancel. Converting alphabets may take several minutes to complete. If you decide that you didn't want to remove the lock stitches from the alphabets, select Tools->Restore Alphabets. You will see the following dialog box: When you click Restore Now, all of the installed alphabets will be restored to their backup file Rev. A DesignShop Tools

228 214 Design Filter Design Filter This function applies to the editing of Expanded data designs only. Since Jump Stitch elements consist entirely of expanded jump stitches, the Accumulate jump stitches field in the design filter should be disabled. If Accumulate jump stitches is enabled the Jump Stitch element will be filtered out and the needle will not be positioned correctly in the expanded design. Stitch Filter To use the filter, turn on the functions that you wish to affect your design by left-clicking in the box next to the function (click again and the check mark that was just inserted will be removed). A check mark in the box symbolizes the function is ON, whereas no check mark in the box symbolizes that the function is OFF. When your changes are complete, click the Filter Now button. Accumulate Jump Stitches: When you digitize a jump stitch between two points, the computer makes the move in increments of the stitch length you are using. For example, if the total distance you are moving is 360 points, and your stitch length is 40 points, then the computer will generate 9 stitches (in the jump stitch mode) to cover that distance. By turning ON this function, you will force the computer to cover the 360-point distance in increments of the maximum stitch length for the format you are using. Most multi-head machines have a maximum stitch length of 127 points. Assuming we are using a format with a 127-point maximum stitch length, then the computer would generate only 3 stitches to cover the 360 point movement. This would decrease the design's stitch count, and save a little sewing time. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

229 Proximity Filter 215 Accumulate Short Stitches: This function will delete all short stitches that are equal to, or less than, the length that you set in Short Stitch Length. This function will filter out a series of short stitches; therefore, if you desire to protect your lock stitches, you must enter the number of consecutive short stitches that you want to protect in the After Short stitch count box. The box below Accumulate Short Stitches, labeled After Short, is the short stitch count. This function is used in conjunction with Accumulate Short Stitches and allows you to determine the number of consecutive short stitches that will not be deleted when you use the Accumulate Short Stitches function. You may enter any number up to and including 20 stitches. Delete Single Short Stitches: This does not refer to your column stitches, but rather those zero-motion or tiny walk stitches that are sometimes in designs. There are also some very tiny stitches in the fills that are digitized when the needle begins sewing a new line of stitch. This function will only delete a single short stitch, that is, a short stitch that is preceded by, and followed by, a stitch that exceeds the length defined in Short Stitch Length. Two or more consecutive short stitches will not be affected by this function. This function allows you to filter out any random short stitches without filtering out your lock stitches. Maximum Stitch Length: Any stitches greater than this value will be broken down with intervening jump stitches by the computer. For most multi-head formats this value should not exceed 127 points. For Tajima format this value should not exceed 121 points. Short Stitch Length: This function allows you to enter a length, from 0 to 5 points, that defines what a short stitch is. For example, if you enter a length of 3 points; then any stitch that has a length of 3 points or less will be considered a short stitch, and will be acted upon by the other short stitch functions. Do not turn on Accumulate Jump Stitches if you have a design in which you want to use thread trimmers. Proximity Filter This tool (which is also known as the Design Analyzer) detects areas of stitch points that are on top of each other. This tool also allows you Rev. A DesignShop Tools

230 216 Proximity Filter to enter an offset (in points) to move these points away from each other. To use this tool, open a design, then select Tools->Filter->Stitch Proximity Plot. This plot will display areas that contain a large number of stitches in a small area. The image below displays a zoomed in view of a design. To move these points away from each other, select Tools->Filter->Proximity Filter. You will see the following dialog: The Max Offset Distance (measured in points) determines how far DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

231 Factory Defaults 217 these points will be moved from each other. The default is 1.5 points. The selection in the Sensitivity pull-down determines how many stitches will be offset (moved apart). When the sensitivity is set at Low (the default), only stitches in the darkest areas will be moved. The number of stitches to be moved will increase when the setting is at Medium, and will increase more when set at High Click OK to apply your changes and close the dialog. Factory Defaults The Factory Defaults dialog box can be opened by selecting Tools->Factory Defaults. You can restore the default settings for Complex Fill, Column 1, Column 2, Singleline Columns, Walk Stitches, Lettering, the Workspace Area (View Window), Color Palette and Grid/Origin. An example of how to restore the current settings to the factory default settings follows: 1. Start DesignShop. 2. Open a design with one or more of the element types listed above. 3. Change the properties for one or more of the element types listed above. 4. Select Tools->Factory Defaults Rev. A DesignShop Tools

232 218 Hoop Manager 5. To restore defaults for each type you changed, left-click to check the box beside the element type. Then click OK. This should restore the defaults at all selection levels (project, design, element). Hoop Manager The Hoop Manager allows you to view information on the predefined hoops commonly used with the AMAYA and other embroidery machines. The Hoop Manager also allows you to create user-defined, custom hoops. To access the Hoop Manager, select Tools->Hoop Setup (in Design View, you can also right-click the Hoop Manager button ). Pre-Defined Hoops The Hoop Manager stores and displays the following information about pre-defined hoops. This information cannot be changed. Machine Manufacturer: The Machine Manufacturer list displays several embroidery machine manufacturers. (Click the pull-down arrow to display the list, then left-click a manufacturer to select). The selected manufacturer will determine which machines are shown in the Machine Name list. Machine Name List: The Machine Name list displays the machines DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

233 Hoop Manager 219 produced by the selected manufacturer. For example, the AMAYA will only appear in the Machine Name list when ARC - Melco is selected as the manufacturer. (Click the pull-down arrow to display the list, then left-click a machine name to select). The selected machine will determine which hoops are available in the Hoop Name list. Hoop Name: The Hoop Name list displays which hoops are associated with the selected machine. To change which hoops are displayed in this list, click the Customize Hoop List button (located directly under the Hoop Name pull-down menu). This will display the following dialog: When the checkbox next to a hoop name is checked, the hoop will be displayed in the list. To hide a hoop name in the list, uncheck the hoop s corresponding checkbox. When you click OK to close the dialog and display your changes, the hoop will not be visible in the list. To display a hoop that has been hidden, simply check its corresponding checkbox in this dialog. NOTE: The 15cm / 5.9 inch hoop will not be available in this dialog because it is the default displayed hoop. Hoop Attributes: When a hoop is selected (click the pull-down arrow to display the list, then left-click a hoop name to select), that hoop's attributes will be displayed. These programmed dimensions will be grayed out; this information cannot be changed. Hoop Type: the type of the selected hoop (rectangular, circular, square, etc.) Rev. A DesignShop Tools

234 220 Hoop Manager X Dimensions: the width of the hoop from left to right (measured from the outside edge of one side of the inner hoop to the outside edge of the other side of the inner hoop) Y Dimensions: the height of the hoop from top to bottom (measured from the outside edge of one side of the inner hoop to the outside edge of the other side of the inner hoop) X and Y Offset: the distance from the machine origin to the hoop center Hoop Thickness: the width of the outside edge of the hoop wall to the inside edge of the hoop wall After selecting a hoop, you can click the Trace button and DesignShop will trace your design and give you a message that tells you whether or not your design fits in the selected hoop. Click OK to close the Hoop Manager dialog. User-Defined Hoops Complete the following steps to create a custom hoop. 1. Make sure AMAYA is selected in the Machine Name pull-down menu (Arc - Melco must be selected as the Machine Manufacturer). 2. Click the Add Hoop button in the Hoop Manager window. Type in a name for the new hoop and click OK. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

235 Hoop Manager Select a hoop shape from the Hoop Type pull-down menu. 4. Enter the attributes of the new hoop in the Hoop Attributes area. X Dimension: the width of the hoop from left to right. This measurement should be from the outside edge of one side of the inner hoop to the outside edge of the other side of the inner hoop (see following image). Y Dimension: the height of the hoop from top to bottom. This measurement should be from the outside edge of one side of the inner hoop to the outside edge of the other side of the inner hoop (see following image). Hoop Thickness: the width from the outside edge of the inner hoop to the inside edge of the inner hoop (see following image). If you do not enter a hoop thickness, the Hoop Manager will use a default thickness of 65 points Rev. A DesignShop Tools

236 222 Hoop Manager X dimension Y dimension hoop thickness NOTE: Some hoops (such as Fast Frames) consist of a single frame rather than an inner and outer hoop. To measure the hoop thickness of this type of hoop, measure the thickness of the frame as shown in the example hoop below. To obtain the X dimension, measure the outer edge of the frame horizontally (left to right). To obtain the Y dimension, measure vertically (top to bottom) as shown in the following image. Notice that the Y dimension is not measured to the edge of the bracket. X dimension hoop thickness Y dimension X and Y Offset: the distance from the machine origin to the hoop center. It is necessary to enter offsets when the hoop center is not aligned with the machine origin (the needle plate hole). DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

237 Hoop Manager 223 Offsets will align the hoop center to the machine origin. Please note that you will not always need an X and Y offset; for example, in many cases, only a Y offset is needed. To measure for offsets, you must first select a pre-defined hoop (e.g., 15cm) on your machine, then center the hoop. Then attach the hoop you are defining to your machine. To measure for the X offset, measure the horizontal distance (in inches) from the hoop center to the needle plate hole. If you need to move the hoop center to the left (your left as you face the machine), enter a negative number for this value. To measure for the Y offset, measure the vertical distance (in inches) from the hoop center to the needle plate hole. If you need to move the hoop center toward the machine, enter a negative number for this value. 5. After you enter the hoop attributes, the Hoop Manager will have the information needed to create the new hoop. Click OK to save your changes and close the Hoop Manager dialog. The new hoop will now be available from the Hoop Manager hoop list. outer edge of inner hoop inner edge of inner hoop sew field When the hoop is displayed in the View Window of DesignShop, you will see two solid lines and a dashed line. The outer solid line Rev. A DesignShop Tools

238 224 Hoop Manager represents the outer edge of the inner hoop (drawn based on entered X and Y dimensions). The inner solid line represents the inner edge of the inner hoop. The dotted line represents the sew field for the defined hoop. The Hoop Manager determines the sew field from the value in the Default Sew Field Margin box. If you have not changed this value, the sew field will be 126 embroidery points (approximately 0.50 inches) from the inner edge of the inner hoop (the inner solid line). You can change this to any desired value, and this value will be saved with the hoop. Additional Settings Associated Machines - To change the machine(s) associated with the new hoop, click the Change Associated Machines button in the Hoop Manager Properties dialog. To select a machine, left-click the machine name, then click (>). [To select all machines click (<<)]. Click OK when you are finished selecting machines. You can enter an image file name (in the Bitmap File box) if you have an image of the new hoop. This image will be displayed in the main Hoop Manager window. (The ideal size for this image is 1.3 inches wide x 0.82 inches tall). After you type the name of the image in the Bitmap File box, copy the image file into the following directory (Design Shop Install DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

239 Hoop Manager 225 Directory\System\Bitmaps). Click OK or Apply when you have completed your changes. Custom Hoop Shape When creating a custom hoop, the shape of your hoop may not be available from the Hoop Type menu. If it is not, you will need to create a custom hoop shape. In our example, we will create a rectangular hoop with round edges that is 11 x 8.5 inches (28 x 22 cm). To create a custom hoop shape: 1. Creating a custom hoop shape involves entering a list of points that will define the shape in the Hoop Manager. Before you open the Hoop Manager, you can determine these points. The easiest way to obtain these points is to trace your hoop on a piece of paper. When tracing, trace around the outer edge of the inner hoop. After tracing, draw a vertical line to split the hoop exactly in half vertically (this will be the Y axis). Next, draw a horizontal line to split the hoop exactly in half horizontally (this will be the X axis). The point where the two lines cross will be the hoop center (0,0). (See the following image, which displays the traced outline of our example hoop). (0,0) X axis Y axis 2. Now you need to determine the points you are going to enter in the Hoop Manager. On the traced hoop, draw up to 32 points all the way around the hoop. You must place a point at any Rev. A DesignShop Tools

240 226 Hoop Manager location where the X/Y axes intersect with the hoop outline (see the following image). The more points you choose to enter, the smoother the drawing of the hoop will be onscreen. Try to place as many points as you can on any curved areas of your hoop. (The following image displays 28 points selected to enter for our example hoop. Notice how most of the points are clustered at the curves of the hoop). (0,0) X axis Y axis 3. Now you need to measure the distance from each point to the hoop center. You can take these measurements in inches or centimeters. For each point you will need to take two measurements: the horizontal distance from the hoop center (0,0) and the vertical distance from the hoop center. Note that the closer the points are together, the more exact your measurements should be. Once you have these measurements, you will need to determine the coordinates of each point in embroidery points. For the X coordinate, multiply the horizontal distance by 254 if measured in inches or by 100 if measured in centimeters. If the point is to the left of the hoop center, the coordinate will be a negative number. Repeat this for the Y coordinate (vertical distance). If the point is below the hoop center, this coordinate will be a negative number. After calculating the embroidery points, round them to whole DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

241 Hoop Manager 227 numbers. You will now have the coordinates needed to enter in Hoop Manager. See the following image for examples of these measurements (note that distances were measured in inches). (4.8 inches x 254 = points) (-1219, 965) (3.8 inches x 254 = points) (0,0) X axis (1397, 0) (4.25 inches x 254 = points) (3.75 inches x 254 = points) (-953, -1080) **First point entered** (X1, Y1) (X2, Y2) Y axis (5.5 inches x 254 = 1397 points) 4. Click the Add Hoop button in the Hoop Manager Properties dialog. Enter a name for the new hoop and click OK. 5. Enter the hoop thickness and offsets, if any (see pg. 221 for details). You do not need to enter X and Y dimensions or select a hoop type because you are creating your own hoop type (shape). [In our example we entered 0.25 in. for hoop thickness.] 6. Click the Edit Hoop Shape button. You will see the Hoop Shape Definition dialog. 7. In this dialog you will enter points to plot the shape of your hoop. After you have calculated all of your points, you can enter them in the Hoop Manager. In the Hoop Shape Definition dialog, select Custom Shape from the Hoop Type pull-down menu Rev. A DesignShop Tools

242 228 Hoop Manager 8. In the Number of Points text box, type the number of points you will be entering. Once you type this number, the coordinate text boxes will no longer be grayed out. 9. You can now type in the coordinates of your points, beginning with the lowest point (type this point in the X1 and Y1 boxes). If you have more than one lowest point, enter the point that is farthest to the left. (The first point of our example hoop is indicated in the image on the previous page.) After entering the first point, proceed in a counter-clockwise direction around the hoop and enter the remaining points. The following image displays all of the points of our example hoop typed in the Hoop Shape Definition dialog. First point Custom Shape selected Number of points must be entered 10. After you entering all points, click the Apply button. 11. The Hoop Manager will notify you if the shape is invalid. For example, you will receive an error message if your shape does not form a convex polygon (the hoop must be a convex polygon, that is, none of the sides can be dented inward). If you received an error message, check your points to make sure you entered them correctly. 12. Click OK to close the Hoop Shape Definition dialog. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

243 Hoop Manager Your custom hoop with custom hoop shape will now be available in the Hoop Manager. Custom Sew Field Shape As mentioned above, the Hoop Manager will determines the sew field from the value in the Default Sew Field Margin box (the sew field takes the shape of the defined hoop). If you wish to change the sew field, click the Sew Field Shape button in the Hoop Manager Properties dialog. You will see the following window: In this window, you can either select a pre-defined sew field shape or create a custom sew field shape. To select a pre-defined sew field shape (based on hoop types), select the type from the Hoop Type menu (e.g., circular in the above image). To specify the sew field size, enter the X Dimension (sew field width), Y Dimension (sew field height) and X and Y Offsets (the vertical and horizontal distances from the sew field center to the hoop center). You can also enter points to create a custom sew field shape. To do this, use the same procedure used to create a custom hoop shape. (See pg. 225). Clicking the Reset to Default Sew Field Value will reset the sew field to the value on the Hoop Manager Properties dialog (see pg. 225) Rev. A DesignShop Tools

244 230 Hoop Manager When finished, click Apply. You will receive a message if your sew field is not valid. Multi-Ring Hoops (Spider Hoops) Pre-Defined Spider Hoop Configurations Five preset spider hoop configurations are available in the Hoop Manager. Twin Spider 2-12cm (two 12cm hoops) Twin Spider 4-12cm (four 12cm hoops) Twin Spider 2-15cm (two 15cm hoops) Twin Spider 2-18cm (two 18cm hoops) Twin Spider 2-22cm (two 22cm hoops) Please note that when a spider hoop configuration is selected, only one inner hoop will be displayed in the View Window. You can view the attributes of these preset hoops in the Hoop Manager (Tools->Hoop Manager), but these attributes cannot be changed. Creating Custom Spider Hoops If you would like to use a spider hoop other than the Melco Spider Hoop Option, you can create a user-defined spider hoop in the Hoop Manager. Please note that you must create a spider hoop for each configuration of hoops that you plan to use with the spider hoop (a configuration can only use one hoop size). As an example, the AMAYA Spider Frame can hold up to four 12 cm (4.7 inch) hoops at a time or two 15 cm (5.9 inch), 18 cm (7.1 inch) or 22 cm (8.3 inch) hoops at a time. Notice that in the Hoop Manager there are preset spider hoop options for each of the possible configurations. To create a user-defined spider hoop, complete the following steps. (A spider frame with six circular holes will be used as an example). 1. Select Tools->Hoop Manager to open the Hoop Manager. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

245 Hoop Manager Click the Add Hoop button. Type the name of your hoop and click OK. 3. Select a hoop type from the Type pull-down menu. The type reflects the shape of the hoops that will be inserted into the frame. (In our example, circular is chosen). 4. Enter the X and Y dimensions of the hoops that will be inserted into the frame. (All hoops must be the same size when defining a custom spider hoop). Measure from one side of the outer edge of the hoop to the other side of the outer edge. (In our example, X and Y dimensions of 2 inches have been entered). 5. If needed, enter the X and Y offsets of the frame (also called the outer hoop). The X and Y offsets are the measured distance from the machine origin (needleplate hole) to the hoop center. It is necessary to enter offsets when the hoop center is not aligned with the needleplate hole. Offsets will align the hoop center to the needleplate hole. (In our example we have no offsets). 6. Enter the thickness of the hoops that will be inserted into the frame. Measure from the outside edge of the hoop to the inside edge of the hoop. If you do not enter a hoop thickness, the Hoop Rev. A DesignShop Tools

246 232 Hoop Manager Manager will use a default thickness of 65 points. (In our example, a thickness of 0.25 inches has been entered). 7. Click the Multi Ring Settings button. You will see the following dialog. 8. Select the type of the outer hoop from the Type pull-down menu. (In our example Rectangular has been selected). 9. Enter the dimensions of the outer hoop- X Size is the width; Y Size is the length/depth. (In our example, an X size of 10 in. and a Y size of 7 in. have been entered). 10. In the Number of Rings box, enter the number of rings you wish to be available in the configuration. (In our example we have entered 6 because we want to insert six hoops). 11. In the Rings Offsets area, you will need to enter the offsets for each ring you will be sewing in. Measure from the center of each ring to the center of the spider frame. (See the drawing below). DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

247 Hoop Manager Y offset 1.5 Y offset 1.5 Y offset -3 X offset 3 X offset -1.5 Y offset Frame Center -1.5 Y offset -1.5 Y offset In our example, the rings below the frame center have negative Y offsets of 1.5 inches, and the rings above the frame center have positive Y offsets of 1.5 inches. The rings to the left of the frame center have negative X offsets of 3 inches, and the rings to the right of the frame center have positive X offsets of 3 inches. 12. Click Apply. 13. Click OK to close the Multiring Settings dialog. 14. Click OK to close the Hoop Manager dialog. Note: It is possible to create a custom outer hoop shape, custom ring shape, and a custom sew field shape when creating user-defined spider hoops. To create any of these custom shapes, you should follow the procedure beginning on pg Rev. A DesignShop Tools

248 234 Tablet Digitizer Tablet Digitizer (This option applies only to DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro + product levels.) The process of digitizing with a tablet is similar to onscreen digitizing. You can create elements by inputting a series of straight and/or curved points. Please scroll down for further information. The required components for tablet digitizer are as follows: Digitizing Tablet - Any tablet that conforms to Summagraphic's Microgrid Format (most tablets supported by DesignShop fall into this category). Tablet Toolbar - A "stick on" template that closely resembles the DesignShop input toolbar Computer Serial Port - capable of handling 2400baud, no parity, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit. DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro + Levels - The tablet will only function with the DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro + product levels. Tablet Setup If you have either the DesignShop Pro or DesignShop Pro + product level, the tablet may be set up by selecting Tools->Options. Then click on the Digitizing Properties tab. All controls (except sound) will initially be disabled. To enable all controls, click on the Tablet Present checkbox. Select the COM port per your hardware capabilities. You can select how your puck buttons are mapped. Default mappings are as follows: Button 1 - Straight Point Button 2 - Enter Button 3 - Curved Point Button 4 - Move Tablet Toolbar DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

249 Tablet Digitizer 235 The Tablet Toolbar Set Origin - To set the origin of the artwork, click on this tool followed by a puck click (any puck button not mapped as the Move menu button) on the origin of the artwork. Set Horizontal - To set the angle of the artwork, click on this tool followed by a puck click (any puck button not mapped as the Move menu button) on the bottom left edge of the artwork followed by another click on the bottom right edge of the artwork. Move Artwork - This function allows you to digitize a design which has artwork larger than the active area of the tablet digitizer. You are able to digitize up to a point, then move your artwork and resume digitizing with no break in the design. To move artwork and maintain the original origin, perform the following steps: 1. Click on the Move Artwork tool. 2. Click on a point (example point x) on the artwork 3. Move the artwork. 4. Click on point x again. 5. Click on the bottom left edge of the artwork followed by another click on the bottom right edge of the artwork. 6. Continue digitizing as normal. Retrace On/Off - Click on the retrace button to switch from On to Off. When this function is On, all newly digitized walk stitches will retrace back to the first digitized point. Before any toolbar function can be used, the toolbar position must be given to the computer by: 1. Position the menu to the desired location on the tablet. 2. Click on the orientation mark on the bottom left of the toolbar (use the puck button mapped as "Move Menu") 3. Click on the orientation mark on the bottom right of the toolbar (use the puck button mapped as "Move Menu")The tablet toolbar is a stick on device that contains tools for the various digitizing functions. Because of its similarity to the DesignShop input toolbar, only differences are described below: Backspace - This tool simulates the pressing of the BACKSPACE key on the keyboard. Each time this tool is clicked on, the last entered point is removed from the screen. Escape - This tool simulates the pressing of the ESCAPE key on the keyboard. Click on this tool to remove the last digitized element Rev. A DesignShop Tools

250 236 Tablet Digitizer Digitizing Hints The artwork origin and angle are saved in the registry. Once the parameters are set, it is only necessary to change them when the artwork is moved. Once the tablet is configured your may enter points by choosing the appropriate input tool from the tablet toolbar or the DesignShop input toolbar and then entering straight and/or curved wireframe points. While an element is being digitized from the tablet, mouse input from DesignShop is ignored. Mouse input will be recognized once the element is finished being digitized. All element parameters such as density, underlay, stitch length, etc. are set from the property sheets as done for on screen digitizing. Digitizing Sound Effects This feature only applies to DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro + product levels. DesignShop supports the ability to produce audible sounds when a mouse button or puck button is clicked during digitizing. To enable this effect, select Tools->Options, then select the Digitizing Properties tab (you must have the DesignShop Pro or DesignShop Pro + product level). When Sound is turned On, an audible tone will be heard from the computer each time a button is pressed on the active digitizing device (mouse / puck). The following table shows what tones will be heard depending on the operating system and hardware present: Windows NT/ 2000/ XP with a sound card Windows NT/ 2000/ XP without a sound card Windows 98 with a sound card Windows 98 without a sound card Unique tone from sound card Unique tone from computer speaker Unique tone from sound card Standard system beep from computer speaker DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

251 Security 237 Security There are three tabs under Tools->Security. The three tabs are General, Levels, and Options. The General Tab displays the Melco dongles that are attached to that particular computer and the Serial Number associated with each dongle. The Levels tab displays the current level. If upgrading to another level, here is where you will type in the password for the higher level. The first level is DesignShop Lite, which is primarily a lettering system. The next Level is DesignShop, which contains lettering, editing, and limited digitizing. The next level is DesignShop Pro, which contains everything in DesignShop plus digitizing with graphics. The highest level is DesignShop Pro +, which contains everything in DesignShop Pro, plus Auto-Digitizing Rev. A DesignShop Tools

252 238 Step and Repeat The Options tab displays the available options. This is where you would type the password for purchased options. Step and Repeat (Available in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro+ only) The Step and Repeat option is ideal for patches and emblems, because it allows the automatic duplication of a design in a matrix DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

253 Step and Repeat 239 format (in columns and rows). To access step and repeat, you must first open a design, select the design, then select Tools->Step and Repeat. To use step and repeat, you will input the size of the matrix by entering the desired number of columns and rows. (See image below). Columns: The number of columns you want in the step and repeat matrix. Row: The number of rows you want in the step and repeat matrix. Space: The amount of space (in inches) you want between designs. The Columns space will determine the horizontal distance between designs. The Rows space will determine the vertical distance between the designs. The distance is measured from the center of the designs. As an example, if you enter 2 inches for the Columns space, the design will be tiled with a horizontal spacing of 2 inches; the centers of the duplicated designs will be 2 inches apart. Total on Last Row: The number of designs you want placed in the last row. The default value for this setting is 4. You should verify this number before saving the group name design. If this number is too low, you could lose some of the names you wish to sew. As an example, you could create a 5 x 5 matrix to sew out 25 names. If the total on last row number is 3, you will only sew out 3 designs on the last row, losing two names. After you apply the Step and Repeat settings and return to the View Window, you will see the layout of the tiled designs Rev. A DesignShop Tools

254 240 Batch Converter You have the ability to select the first design in the matrix. If you make any changes to it, such as resizing it, the duplicated designs will reflect the changes also. You will not be able to see exactly how the names will sew out until you select File->Save As, save the design, then re-open it. You can also use Step and Repeat functionality in conjunction with Group Names. When you add group names to a design, then step and repeat the design, the group names will be incorporated into the duplicated design (i.e., each design duplicate will include a name from the group name list you created). See pg. 135 for detailed instructions on using Group Names. Batch Converter (Available in DesignShop and higher product levels) This tool converts a group of files (of any embroidery file type) to any embroidery file format. To use the converter, complete the following steps: 1. Select Tools->Batch Converter. You will see the following dialog: DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

255 Batch Converter Select a Source Folder and a Destination Folder. The Source Folder is the location in which the files you wish to convert are stored. To change this folder, click the Browse button and navigate to the appropriate folder. The Destination Folder is the location to which the converted files will be saved. (You can also click this folder s corresponding Browse button to change the folder). Note that when you change the Source Folder the Destination Folder also changes (but not vice versa). 3. Select the file type you wish to convert in the Input File Type pull-down menu, and select the output file format in the Output File Type pull-down menu. By default, all the files of the input file type in the Source folder will be converted to the output file type and saved in the Destination folder. However, if you only want to convert a few files at one time, click the Select Files button. In the dialog that appears, select the files you want to convert. When you convert the files, only the files you have selected will be converted. Convert Expanded to Wireframe: When this setting is turned on (box is checked), if any of the files of the selected input type contain expanded objects and you are converting to a wireframe output type, all expanded objects will be converted to wireframe elements. (This feature is only available at the DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro+ product levels). 4. Select a color palette from the Use Color Data pull-down menu. This color palette will be used to save color information during the conversion. Please note that this pull-down menu will not always be available because color information is not saved with all file types. 5. Click the Convert button to start the conversion. If Batch Converter cannot convert all of the files, the file names will be displayed in the Unable to Convert box Rev. A DesignShop Tools

256 242 Batch Converter DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

257 7. AUTO-DIGITIZING IN THIS CHAPTER: Introduction Bitmap vs. Vector Images Preparing Images for Auto-Digitizing Working with Vector Graphics Working with Bitmap Images Converting Pieces of a Graphic Rev. A Melco Embroidery Systems

258 244 Introduction Introduction Please note that Auto-Digitizing is only available in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro + product levels. For a tutorial on Auto-Digitizing, see pg Auto-Digitizing is an advanced automation software module, which allows custom artwork (either from a scanner or graphics program) to be directly converted to embroidery design data for DesignShop. More specifically, Auto-Digitizing has been designed to dramatically reduce the amount of time and expertise needed to create sophisticated embroidery designs from original artwork. For the digitizer, this translates into tremendous time savings, in some cases allowing work that would normally take hours to be completed within minutes. Alternatively, for the small embroidery shop, Auto- Digitizing may allow you to forgo the cost and time required to send out basic artwork for custom embroidery punching. Auto-Digitizing software does not eliminate the need for expert digitizers. However, for typical business logo artwork or basic clipart the software can provide an enormous savings in time and effort and can significantly reduce the amount of training or expertise required to quickly create custom embroidery designs. Bitmap vs. Vector Images Before continuing with this chapter, it is important to understand the differences between bitmap graphics and vector graphics. This will help you understand why DesignShop treats these two types of images differently when converting them to embroidery data. Bitmap graphics are composed of pixels, each of which contains specific color information. A pixel is very small; a single image may be composed of hundreds of thousands of individual pixels. The bitmap format is ideal for complex images that contain thousands of different colors, which is why digital photographic images are most often saved in this format. DesignShop can open the following bitmap file formats: bmp, jpeg, pcx, and tiff. Vector graphics consist of individual objects, not pixels. These objects can include points, lines, and curves, and can be filled with solid DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

259 Preparing Images for Auto-Digitizing 245 colors, gradients, and patterns. Vector graphics are based on mathematical relationships between these objects. For this reason, vector graphics are ideal for images, such as logos, that often need to be changed (e.g., resized). DesignShop can open the following vector file formats: eps, wmf, emf, dxf, and cdr (up to version 9). Note that eps files can contain bitmap information as well, but DesignShop strictly treats them as vector graphics. When converting a vector graphic to embroidery data, DesignShop must first break down the graphic into vector objects, then convert these objects to embroidery. Because bitmap images are composed of pixels and not objects, they can be directly converted to embroidery data. Preparing Images for Auto-Digitizing Auto-Digitizing can be used with any graphics that can be opened by DesignShop. Following the guidelines below will help produce the best results, particularly when working with bitmap images: As a general rule, most scanned images are bitmap images. That is, when a picture is loaded into the computer via a scanner, it is broken down and stored as a series of pixels. Each pixel can be viewed as a small square dot of a single color that corresponds to a specific location within the original image. However, the number of dots that are scanned and stored for any given picture is dependent on the resolution at which the picture was scanned. Specifically, the resolution specifies how many pixels are generated per square inch (or per square millimeter). In order for humans to see a sharp image (i.e. without noticing these small dots), an image must have a high resolution. For example, at a resolution of 300 dots per inch (dpi), the dots become so small that they typically go unnoticed when viewed by the human eye. Alternatively, a low-resolution image, for example stored at 100 dots per inch, may appear jagged or unclear because the individual dots are much larger and become more noticeable. Thus as expected, in order for Auto-Digitizing to be effective in generating accurate embroidery designs that do not appear Rev. A Auto-Digitizing

260 246 Working with Vector Graphics jagged, the source image must be relatively sharp and must be stored at a high resolution. If you are scanning a graphic that will be used with Auto- Digitizing, it is recommended that the image be scanned at a resolution of at least 250 dpi, which roughly corresponds to the inherent resolution at which condensed data points are stored. It has been determined that for most images to be used with Auto- Digitizing, 300 dpi is the optimum resolution. In general, you will obtain better Auto-Digitizing results with clean images (as opposed to noisy images). Clean images basically consist of clear, large, well-defined areas of solid colors (e.g., most clipart consists of clean images). Because of how they are created, vector images are always clean. Bitmap images can be noisy, which mean they contain features such as half-toning and shading that make them appear blurry or imprecise. It is easier for Auto-Digitizing to convert clean images to embroidery data. You can clean an image using third party photo editing or paint programs. Also note that the examples directory (installed with your DesignShop software; default: C:\Designs\Graphics) contains some complete examples of noisy and clean images (all Floral designs are noisy, others are clean). You may want to review some of these examples in order to gain a better idea of the differences between these types of images. Working with Vector Graphics Please note that Vector Graphic functionality is only available in the DesignShop Pro+ product level. To convert a vector graphic (eps, wmf, emf, dxf, and cdr) to embroidery data, complete the following steps: 1. Open a vector graphic. 2. Select the graphic in the Project Tree. 3. Click the Convert Graphic button. This will convert the graphic to vector graphic objects. These objects will be displayed DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

261 Working with Vector Graphics 247 in the Project Tree. The display of the graphic in the View Window does not change, but the displayed graphic is now separated into the vector objects. (See the following image). These vector objects can be selected either in the Project Tree or the View Window. Once you have selected an object, you can edit the object s control points (i.e., move, add, and delete points). You can also scale and/or rotate vector objects. At this point you may also want to Auto-Sequence some or all of the vector objects. See pg. 109 for details. 4. You can now convert the graphic objects to embroidery data. First select the object(s) you wish to convert. As with design elements, you can select one, some, or all graphic objects in a project. (See pg. 99 for details on selecting in DesignShop.) Once you have selected all desired objects, click the Stitch Vector Objects toolbar button. Clicking this button will open the Stitch Vector Object dialog. Use the following descriptions to learn about the settings in this dialog Rev. A Auto-Digitizing

262 248 Working with Vector Graphics Stitch Type: The selected graphic object(s) will be converted to the stitch type selected in this pull-down menu. If Automatic is selected, stitches will be generated based on the vector object type. Click the Properties button to change the properties selected stitch type (note that if Automatic is selected, Column, Walk and Fill property tabs will be available). Include Holes: When this setting is turned on (box is checked), if there are any holes in the vector object, these holes will be generated in the embroidery data. Add Color Change: When this setting is turned on (box is checked), a color change will be inserted after each converted element when necessary (when a color change in the graphic occurs). Only Stitch Visible: When this setting is turned on, only the visible portions of the vector objects will be stitched (covered portions will not be stitched). Overlap: This setting determines by how many points adjacent elements will overlap. Prev, Next, and Skip buttons: Clicking these buttons will move through the vector list. (The selected vector object will change as you move through the list). The Prev button will select the previous object in the list, the Next button will select the next vector object, and the Skip button will skip the next vector object and DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

263 Working with Vector Graphics 249 select the following object. These buttons are useful if you want to step through the vector list and convert one object at a time. 5. When you are ready to convert, click the Convert button. This will convert the selected vector object(s) to embroidery data. If you are moving through the objects one at a time, you must click the Convert button for each object you want to stitch. 6. You can now edit the embroidery data as you would in any design. Working with Vector Objects As mentioned above, vector objects can be scaled and rotated, and vector control points can be edited. DesignShop also offers several additional tools to use when working with vector objects. Subtract Vector Objects When vector objects overlap each other, the Subtract Vector Objects tool can be used to remove the layering of these objects. To use this tool, select two or more overlapping vector objects, then click the Subtract Vector Objects toolbar button. Any areas of the object(s) that (after conversion to embroidery) would be sewn under other objects will be removed. The result will be that some objects will be separated into two or more objects, and the layering will be removed Rev. A Auto-Digitizing

264 250 Working with Vector Graphics For example, in the vector graphic displayed in the following image, when converted to embroidery and sewn as is, part of the B will be sewn under the letter C. To eliminate this layering, you would select both the B and the C, then click the Subtract Vector Objects toolbar button. This will cause the leg of the B to be separated into 3 different vector objects (the areas of the B under the C will be removed). This will remove the layering of the two objects. Combine Vector Objects If two or more overlapping vector objects will be sewn in the same color, the Combine Vector Objects tool can be used to combine them. To use this tool, select two or more overlapping vector objects, then click the Combine Vector Objects toolbar button. This will combine the selected objects to create one object. When converted, this object will become one embroidery element. This tool is useful when you have multiple small, overlapping objects that would be more efficiently sewn as one object. Adding Vector Objects DesignShop provides the ability to add two types of vector objects: vector lines and vector fills. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

265 Working with Vector Graphics 251 To add a vector line, click the Vector Line button. Input the line as you would digitize a walk stitch (see pg. 155 for instructions). This tool is useful, for example, if you need to add an underline to a graphic. To add a vector fill, click the Vector Fill button. Input the vector fill as you would digitize a complex fill (see pg. 182 for instructions). This tool is useful, for example, if you need to add a particular shape (such as a circle) to a graphic. Once added, these vector objects can be converted to embroidery data. Converting Embroidery Designs to Vector Graphics Any embroidery design can be converted to a vector graphic. To do this, open an embroidery design, then select the entire design. Copy the design, then paste it into another program, such as Microsoft Word, Paint Shop Pro, etc. This will provide you with a vector graphic of the embroidery design. NOTE: You can also open an embroidery design in DesignShop, then select File->Save As and save the embroidery file as an emf file. This tool can be useful for screenprinters who want use an embroidery design as a sceenprinting graphic Rev. A Auto-Digitizing

266 252 Working with Bitmap Images Working with Bitmap Images To use Auto-Digitizing with bitmap images, complete the following steps: 1. Open the graphics file you want to convert (File->Open). 2. Scale and position graphic, if necessary. Click the Convert Graphic toolbar button following dialog box:. You will see the Conversion Output: In this pull-down menu, you can choose the output of the conversion. You can either convert the graphic to vector objects (see pg. 253 for more details) or to embroidery data. Number of Colors: If the number of colors in your graphic is creating noise, use this tool to decrease the number of colors in your graphic. Drag this bar to adjust the number of colors in your graphic (in general, the number of colors in noisy graphics should be reduced as much as possible. (In clean graphics, such as clip-art, the number of colors can be increased). DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

267 Working with Bitmap Images 253 If you know how many colors you want in your graphic, check the Specify box and enter the number of colors. Image Filtering: Drag this bar to adjust how much filtering Auto-Digitizing performs on the graphic. This process involves filtering out small outlines and holes in graphics. Overlap: This setting determines how much (the number of points) adjacent elements will overlap. Launch Image Editor: Turning this on (clicking in the box to check it) will open the graphic you are working with in your default graphics editor (e.g., Microsoft Paint). Perform any editing changes, then save the graphic. Return to DesignShop, and click OK in the message window (which states Click OK when you re done editing the bitmap. ) Auto-Digitizing will update the graphic in the View Window to reflect the changes you made. The original graphic is not overwritten; the edited graphic is saved in a folder (named EditedImages) in the DesignShop directory. Include Background: If this box is checked, the background of the graphic will be converted with the graphic during the conversion process. 3. Click OK. Auto-Digitizing will convert the graphic into embroidery data by generating complex fills and complex columns. If you have made changes to the graphic, these changes will be reflected in the generated embroidery data. 4. You can now edit the embroidery data as you would in any design. You should check the generated data to ensure that you will obtain the results you desire. In some cases, you may need to modify the element types that were generated (e.g., you may feel that a fill would be more appropriate when a column was generated). In DesignShop, it is very easy to change element types (right-click the element, and select Change Element Type from the popup menu). Converting Bitmap Images to Vector Objects If Vector Objects is selected as the output in the Image Processing Options dialog, the selected bitmap image will be converted to individual vector objects. The display of the graphic in the View Rev. A Auto-Digitizing

268 254 Converting Pieces of a Graphic Window does not change, but the displayed graphic is now separated into the vector objects. (You can also select a bitmap image, then right-click and select Convert Graphic to Vector Objects to open the Image Processing Options dialog.) Once a bitmap is converted to vector objects, you have more control over how the objects will be stitched, using the Stitch Vector dialog ( pg. 247). Converting Pieces of a Graphic Two methods are available if you only want to convert a piece of a graphic to embroidery data. Stitch Graphic Region This tool will work with both vector and bitmap graphics. To use this tool, open a graphic, then select it. Click the Stitch Graphic Region toolbar button. Point the cursor over the area you want to convert to stitches. Left-click to open the Stitch Object dialog. Make any changes if desired, then click Convert. (If you want to convert without opening this dialog, right-click the area instead.) The area will then be converted to embroidery data. Custom Selection This tool can also be used to convert a portion of a graphic to embroidery data or vector objects. Please note that this tool can only be used with bitmap graphics. To use this tool, first open a bitmap graphic. Select the graphic, then click the Custom Selection toolbar button. Using the custom selection cursor, within the selected element, left-click as many times as necessary to outline the area you wish to convert (you can also left-click, then drag the mouse to outline the points). When you are ready to convert the area, press ENTER or the middle mouse button. This will open the Image Processing dialog. (See pg. 252 for a description of this dialog). When you click OK in this dialog, the selected area of the graphic will be converted. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

269 8. TUTORIALS - USING DESIGNSHOP IN THIS CHAPTER: DesignShop Orientation, pg. 256 Basic Functionality, pg. 257 Customizing your Work Environment, pg Rev. A Melco Embroidery Systems

270 256 DesignShop Orientation DesignShop Orientation This section provides tutorials that will help introduce you to the layout of DesignShop. Working with the Project View 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design in the \Designs folder (the default for this directory is C:\Designs). 3. The Project View starts with the name Earthday. Below is the actual design with a + next to it. 4. Click on the + to expand and see all the elements associated with this design. 5. Practice using the scroll bar on the right of the Project View to scroll through the elements. 6. Practice using the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard to move through the elements. 7. Left-click an element to select it; notice that it is also selected (a selection box is displayed around it) in the View Window. 8. Right-click an element. Notice that many tools, such as Properties dialog pages, are available in this pop-up menu. Working with the View Window 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design in the \Designs folder. The design will be displayed in the View Window. 3. Left-click in several different places in the design. Notice that clicking on an element selects it (displays a selection box around it). DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

271 Basic Functionality Right-click an element. Notice that many tools, such as Properties dialog pages, are available in this pop-up menu. Basic Functionality This section provides tutorials on the basic functions available in DesignShop. Opening a Design Follow the steps below to open a design: 1. Select File->Open (or click on the Open tool on the Main toolbar). 2. Click on the Files of Type drop-down menu to choose the embroidery file type. 3. Click on the design you would like to open (if the design is not in the list, you may have to look in another folder). 4. Click on Open or double-click on the design. Saving a Design Follow the steps below to save a design: 1. Select File->Open. 2. Open Earthday.ofm from the \Designs folder. 3. Select File->Save As. 4. The Save As dialog box is displayed. 5. Type a new filename. 6. Choose the file format from the Save as type drop-down menu. 7. Click on Save. Importing a Design from a Floppy Disk Follow the steps below to import a design: 1. Save any design to a floppy disk. 2. Select File->Import. 3. The Import dialog box is displayed Rev. A Tutorials - Using DesignShop

272 258 Basic Functionality 4. Click on the file format (if you do not know, click on unknown). 5. Click on the Directory button (there must be a disk in the disk drive). 6. Select the design. 7. Click on Import or double-click the design. Exporting a Design to a Floppy Disk Follow the steps below to export a design: 1. Select File->Open. 2. Open Earthday.ofm from the \Designs folder. 3. Select File->Export. 4. The Export dialog box is displayed. 5. Type the filename. 6. Choose the Embroidery format. 7. Click on the Export button (an embroidery format disk must be in the disk drive). Printing a Design 1. Open any design. 2. Click on the Print tool on the Main toolbar (or select File->Print). 3. The Print dialog box is displayed. 4. Choose the parameters to print the designs. 5. Click on OK. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

273 Basic Functionality 259 Printing a Logo 1. Open any design. 2. Click on the Print tool on the Main toolbar (or select File->Print). 3. The Print dialog box is displayed. 4. Make sure the Print Logo box is checked (click inside the box to check it). 5. Click the Browse button. 6. Navigate to the DesignShop Help directory (usually Design Shop\Help). 7. Select printlogo.bmp, then click Open. 8. Click OK on the Print dialog to print the design. The logo will be printed across the top of the page. ing a Design Please note that you must have an connection to complete this tutorial. 1. Open any design. 2. Select File->Send Rev. A Tutorials - Using DesignShop

274 260 Basic Functionality 3. A message (with the open design attached) will open in your default editor. 4. Type in your address, then send the message. Inserting a Design File into a Project 1. Open any design. 2. Click on the Insert File tool on the Main toolbar. 3. The Insert dialog box is displayed. 4. Look in the directory where the design is located. 5. Click on the design you want to insert. 6. Click on Open or double-click on the design. Cut, Copy and Paste 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design in the \Designs folder. 3. Left-click on the + next to the design to show all the elements. 4. Left-click on any element. 5. Click on the tool to Cut or Copy. 6. The element is now on the clipboard. 7. Scroll to the area where you want to paste the copied element. 8. Click on the Paste tool. 9. The cut or copy of the element will be pasted in under the element that is highlighted. NOTE: These elements can also be copied to an existing design or new design. Deleting Parts of a Design 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design in the \Designs folder. 3. Click on the + to view the elements of the design. 4. Use the scroll bar to scroll to the element to delete. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

275 Customizing your Work Environment Left-click to highlight the element. 6. Press the DELETE key on the keyboard or select Edit->Delete. 7. The design will regenerate automatically. NOTE: DesignShop has unlimited undos if you deleted the wrong element. Customizing your Work Environment This section provides tutorials on how to customize your work environment. Using Auto Save 1. Open any design. 2. Select Tools->Options. 3. Click on the File Options tab. 4. To turn on Auto Save, make sure the Auto Save On box is checked (left-click inside box if the box is not checked). 5. Type a new interval amount (in minutes) to Auto Save (e.g., 5 minutes= auto save every five minutes). 6. Click OK Rev. A Tutorials - Using DesignShop

276 262 Customizing your Work Environment Saving Notes to a Design 1. Open any design. 2. Click on the Notes tool on the Main toolbar. 3. Type the notes for your design. 4. DesignShop automatically defaults to Word Pad for your notes. (You can change this to use any Windows application.) 5. The notes will be saved to any design that uses an.ofm file extension. Changing Redraw Speed 1. Open any design. 2. Select View->Redraw Speed. You will see the following dialog. 3. Left-click and drag the slider to adjust the redraw speed. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

277 9. TUTORIALS - EDITING IN THIS CHAPTER: Selecting a Design Graphically (in View Window), pg. 264 Selecting a Design Through the Project View, pg. 264 Scaling Part of a Design Through the Project View, pg. 266 Rotating a design, pg. 267 Centering Designs, pg. 268 Inserting Color Changes and Trims, pg. 269 Checking the Design Status, pg. 270 Adding Lock Stitches (Design Level), pg. 271 Adding Lock Stitches (Element Level), pg. 272 Changing Walk Stitch Length at Element Level, pg. 274 Changing Column Density at Element Level, pg. 275 Changing Column Width at Element Level, pg. 276 Adding Underlay to a Column, pg. 277 Adding Underlay to a Fill, pg. 278 Saving Standard Fill, pg. 279 Editing Wireframe Points, pg Rev. A Melco Embroidery Systems

278 264 Working with Editing Tools The design Earthday.ofm will be used in all of the following exercises. This design was digitized in DesignShop and is included with the designs installed with DesignShop (if you chose to install them). Working with Editing Tools This section highlights some of the editing tools available in DesignShop. Selecting a Design Graphically (in View Window) 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design in the \Designs folder. 3. Zoom out if necessary in order to see entire design. 4. Using a left-click, click and drag a box around the entire design. Selecting a Design Through the Project View 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design in the \Designs folder. 3. Click on the + to view the elements of the design. 4. Left-click on the first element in the design. 5. Use the scroll bar to scroll to end of the Project View. 6. Hold down the SHIFT key on the keyboard. 7. Left-click on the last element of the design. NOTE: All elements and Design are highlighted in the Project View. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

279 Working with Editing Tools 265 Scaling a Design Through the Project View 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design in the \Designs folder. 3. Left-click on the design to highlight it in the Project View. 4. Right-click on the design and select Properties from the pop-up menu. 5. Click on the Scale tab. 6. Make sure the Proportional box is checked. 7. Type 50 in the Horizontal percentage box. 8. Click OK. Scaling a Design Graphically (in View Window) 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design in the \Designs folder. 3. Select the entire design. 4. Click on one of the four corner box handles and drag in or out to scale Rev. A Tutorials - Editing

280 266 Working with Editing Tools Scaling Part of a Design Through the Project View 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design in the \Designs folder. 3. Left-click on the + next to the design to show all the elements. 4. Use the scroll bar on the right to move to the element to be scaled (any element). 5. Right-click on the element and select Properties from the popup menu. 6. Click on the Scale tab. 7. Make sure the Proportional box is checked. 8. Type 50 in the Horizontal percentage box. 9. Click OK. Scaling Part of a Design Graphically (in View Window) 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design in the \Designs folder. 3. Left-click on the circle portion of the sun. 4. There is now a box around the circle. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

281 Working with Editing Tools Click on one of the four corner handles and drag in or out to scale. Rotating a design To rotate the entire design, following the exercises below: 1. Select File->Open. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design from the \Designs folder. 3. Right-click on the design name in the Project View tab. 4. Select Properties from the pop-up menu. 5. Click on the Position Tab. 6. Type the desired rotation amount in degrees. 7. Click on OK (or the Apply button). OR 1. Select File->Open. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design from the \Designs folder. 3. Right-click on the design name in the Project View tab. 4. Select Select Entire Design from the pop-up menu Rev. A Tutorials - Editing

282 268 Working with Editing Tools 5. RIght-click on the selected design and select Rotate from the pop-up menu. (You can also left-click the selected design). You will now have a box around your item that looks like this: pivot point 6. To rotate the item, you will use the pivot point that comes from the middle of the item. You can click and drag the pivot point to have the center of rotation anywhere that you would like. 7. Once you have determined the center of rotation, hold the mouse cursor over a corner of the box; you will see the following cursor. Left-click, then drag the cursor to rotate the design. Centering Designs Before you save or sew the design, you will need to center the design. 1. Open any design. 2. Click the Center Design tool on the Input toolbar. 3. Your design will be centered, and now you can save or sew. NOTE: The design will not move on the screen if it was already in the center. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

283 Working with Editing Tools 269 Inserting Color Changes and Trims 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design in the \Designs folder. 3. Click on the + to view the elements of the design. 4. Use the scroll bar to scroll to the area where you wish to insert the color change. 5. Click on the element above where the color change needs to be inserted. 6. Click on the Color change tool 7. The design will automatically regenerate to show the Color change. NOTE: This same exercise can also be used for inserting trims Rev. A Tutorials - Editing

284 270 Working with Properties Pages Working with Properties Pages There are many adjustments you can make on the properties pages within DesignShop, all of which are discussed in the first half of this manual. This tutorials section highlights a few of them. Checking the Design Status There are two ways to obtain the design status for your designs in DesignShop. 1. Select File->Open. 2. Open Earthday.ofm design from the \Designs folder. 3. Select View->Properties. 4. The Design Properties dialog box comes up. 5. Click on the Status tab. OR 1. Select File->Open. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design from the \Designs folder. 3. With your mouse, right-click the design name in the Project View tab. 4. Choose Properties from the pop-up menu. 5. Click on the Status tab. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

285 Working with Properties Pages 271 Adding Lock Stitches (Design Level) 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design in the \Designs folder. 3. Right-click on any element and select Properties from the popup menu. 4. Click on the Lock/Trim tab. 5. Click the radio button beside Tie in & Tie off. 6. Select an option in the When to Tie pull-down menu: If Always is selected: Tie ins and tie offs will be inserted in all selected elements (including trims and color changes). If Only When Necessary is selected: Tie ins will be inserted at the beginning of the design and after all color changes and trims. Tie offs will be inserted at the end of the design and before all color changes and trims. 7. Click the button next to the Tie In Type pull-down menu. You will see the following dialog: Rev. A Tutorials - Editing

286 272 Working with Properties Pages 8. Click the radio button next to Style Repeat steps 7 and 8 for Tie Off Type. 10. Click OK. Adding Lock Stitches (Element Level) 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design in the \Designs folder. 3. Click on the + next to the design name in the Project View to view the elements of the design. 4. Use the scroll bar to scroll to the element that needs lock stitches. 5. Right-click on the element and select Properties from the popup menu. 6. Click on the Lock/Trim tab. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

287 Working with Properties Pages Click the radio button beside Tie in & Tie off 8. Select an option in the When to Tie pull-down menu: If Always is selected: Tie ins and tie offs will be inserted in all selected elements (including trims and color changes). If Only When Necessary is selected: Tie ins will be inserted at the beginning of the design and after all color changes and trims. Tie offs will be inserted at the end of the design and before all color changes and trims. 9. Click the button next to the Tie In Type pull-down menu. You will see the following dialog: Rev. A Tutorials - Editing

288 274 Working with Properties Pages 10. Click the radio button next to Style Repeat steps 9 and 10 for Tie Off Type. 12. Click OK. Changing Walk Stitch Length at Element Level 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design in the \Designs folder. 3. Click on the + next to the design name in the Project View to view the elements of the design. 4. Use the scroll bar to scroll to any Walk stitch element. 5. Right-click on the element and select Properties from the popup menu. 6. Click on the Walk tab. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

289 Working with Properties Pages Type in a different value for stitch length. 8. Click OK. Changing Column Density at Element Level 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design in the \Designs folder. 3. Click on the + next to the design name in the Project View to view the elements of the design. 4. Use the scroll bar to scroll to any Column element. 5. Right-click on the element and select Properties from the popup menu. 6. Click on the Column tab Rev. A Tutorials - Editing

290 276 Working with Properties Pages 7. Type in a different value for Density or turn-on Auto Density. 8. Click on OK or Apply. NOTE: This changes the properties for this element only. The rest of the design will not be affected. Changing Column Width at Element Level 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design in the \Designs folder. 3. Click on the + next to the design name in the Project View to view the elements of the design. 4. Use the scroll bar to scroll to any column element. 5. Right-click on the element and select Properties from the popup menu. 6. Click on the Column tab. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

291 Working with Properties Pages Change the Width setting to 90%. 8. Click on OK or Apply. NOTE: This changes the properties for this element only. The rest of the design will not be affected. Adding Underlay to a Column 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design in the \Designs folder. 3. Click on the + to view the elements of the design. 4. Use the scroll bar to scroll to any Column element that does not have an underlay. 5. Right-click on the element and select Properties from the popup menu. 6. Click on the Column tab Rev. A Tutorials - Editing

292 278 Working with Properties Pages 7. Select an underlay from the Primary Underlay pull-down menu. 8. Click OK or Apply. Adding Underlay to a Fill 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design in the \Designs folder. 3. Click on the + to view the elements of the design. 4. Use the scroll bar to scroll to any fill element. 5. Right-click on the element and select Properties from the popup menu. 6. Click on the Fill tab. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

293 Working with Properties Pages Check the Underlay On check box in the Primary Underlay area. 8. Click on OK or Apply. Saving Standard Fill This gives the capability to save a user defined fill with a specific Density, Stitch Length, # Partitions, Partition sequence, and Line angle. 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Click on the New tool. 3. Select View->Properties. 4. Click on the Fill tab Rev. A Tutorials - Editing

294 280 Working with Properties Pages 5. Input the Density, Stitch Length, # of Partitions, Partition Sequence and Line Angle of the new fill. 6. Click on the Save Fill button. 7. Type in a number (other than 1-18). 8. Type in a name for the new fill. 9. Click OK out of the Save Fill tab. 10. Click OK out of Fill tab. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

295 Working with Properties Pages This fill is ready to be applied to an existing fill in any design. NOTE: Also, in the Fill tab, you can click on Fill View/Select to view the fill partition graphically. Editing Wireframe Points Please complete this entire section to learn how to select, change, add, move, or delete wireframe points. Selecting Wireframe Input points 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open the Earthday.ofm design from the \Designs folder. 3. Zoom in on the sun in the design using one of the zoom methods. 4. Click on the Edit mode tool on the Input toolbar. 5. Select the sun in the design by clicking on it with the left mouse button (there will be an eight-handled box around the shape). NOTE: Notice the Project View will highlight this element in the design list. 6. When your cursor is over the input point on the wireframe of the sun: Rev. A Tutorials - Editing

296 282 Working with Properties Pages The mouse pointer will show a triangle when placed over a digitized straight input point. The mouse pointer will show a circle when placed over a digitized curve input point. The mouse pointer will show a line when placed over any wireframe line. 7. Click on any input point to select it. The input point will be highlighted and will be displayed as a solid triangle or solid circle. Changing Wireframe Input Points 8. Double-click on the wireframe point with your left mouse button. 9. The Wireframe Point dialog box is displayed. 10. Change to straight or curved. 11. Click on OK (or Apply). NOTE: An alternative way to change the wireframe point from straight to curved or curved to straight is to hold down the SHIFT key and left-click on the point. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

297 Working with Properties Pages 283 Adding Wireframe Input Points 12. Left-click once anywhere on the wireframe line. This will add a straight input point. Moving Wireframe Input Points 13. Left-click, hold and drag the input point with the mouse button. NOTE: Notice the change immediately on the screen. Deleting Wireframe Input Points 14. Left-click on the wireframe point. 15. Press the DELETE key on the keyboard. NOTE: Notice the change immediately on the screen Rev. A Tutorials - Editing

298 284 Working with Properties Pages DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

299 10. TUTORIALS - LETTERING IN THIS CHAPTER: Adding Lettering to a Design, pg. 286 Adding Color Changes to Lettering, pg. 286 Customized Spacing, pg. 287 Adding Specific Trims, pg. 288 Placing Letters on an Arc, pg. 289 Changing Lettering Column Width, pg. 290 Changing Lettering Density, pg. 290 Adding Underlay to Lettering, pg. 291 Centering Lettering, pg. 292 Transforming Lettering (with Base Line Types), pg. 292 Rotating Lettering, pg Rev. A Melco Embroidery Systems

300 286 Adding Lettering to a Design 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open Earthday.ofm from the \Designs folder. 3. Click on the Lettering tool. 4. Left-click on the screen workspace (View Window) where you want the lettering text to appear (notice the arrow has an A attached to it). 5. Type EARTHDAY. 6. Press ENTER. 7. The lettering will be inserted on the screen with the design. Adding Color Changes to Lettering 1. Left-click the Lettering tool. 2. Left-click on the screen workspace (View Window) where you want your lettering text to appear (notice the cursor arrow has an A attached to it). 3. Type ABC on the screen. 4. Press ENTER, then double-click the lettering. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

301 In the Lettering tab text box, place your cursor (left-click) between the A and the B. 6. Click on the color change tool or press F6 on your keyboard (notice the ^ is inserted). 7. Click on OK. Customized Spacing 1. Click on the Lettering tool. 2. Left-click on the screen workspace (View Window) where you want your lettering text to appear (notice the cursor arrow has an A attached to it). 3. Choose the Melco Block alphabet and change the letter height to 1 inch in the floating dialog (see image below). 4. Left-click on the screen workspace again. 5. Type Melco on the screen and press ENTER (notice the spacing needs to be adjusted between certain letters). 6. Double-click the lettering. 7. In the Lettering tab text box, place your cursor (left-click) between the M and the e of the word Melco Rev. A Tutorials - Lettering

302 Click on the (or press F7 on your keyboard) to insert a < for less spacing. 9. Place your cursor (left-click) between the c and the o of the word Melco. 10. Click on the (or press F7 on your keyboard) to insert a < for less spacing. 11. Click on OK. 12. You would use the tool (or the F8 key) to add any spaces to a lettering object. Adding Specific Trims 1. Click on the Lettering tool. 2. Left-click on the screen workspace (View Window) where you want your lettering text to appear (notice the cursor arrow has an A attached to it). 3. Type Melco on the screen. 4. Press ENTER, then double-click the lettering. 5. In the text box on the Lettering tab, place your cursor (left-click) between the M and the e of the word Melco. 6. Click on the Trim tool or press F9 on your keyboard (notice the inserted). DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

303 289 Placing Letters on an Arc 1. Click on the Lettering tool. 2. Left-click on the screen workspace (View Window) where you want your lettering text to appear (notice the cursor arrow has an A attached to it). 3. Type Melco on the screen. 4. Press ENTER, then double-click the lettering. 5. Click the Lettering tab. 6. In the Base Line area of the tab, select Arc in the Line Type pulldown menu (see image below). 7. The Arc properties are displayed in the Base Line area. 8. You can now change the Arc values. Enter 6 in the Radius text box. 9. Click on OK Rev. A Tutorials - Lettering

304 290 Changing Lettering Column Width 1. Click on the Lettering tool. 2. Left-click on the screen workspace (View Window) where you want your lettering text to appear (notice the cursor arrow has an A attached to it). 3. Type Melco on the screen. 4. Press ENTER, then double-click the lettering. 5. Click on the Column Tab. 6. The Column Width is in this dialog box. 7. Change the Column Width to 90%. 8. Click OK. Changing Lettering Density 1. Click on the Lettering tool. 2. Left-click on the screen workspace (View Window) where you want your lettering text to appear (notice the cursor arrow has an A attached to it). 3. Type Melco on the screen. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

305 Press ENTER, then double-click the lettering. 5. Click on the Column Tab. 6. You should see Density in this dialog box. Change the density to 3 pt. 7. Click OK. Adding Underlay to Lettering 1. Click the Lettering tool. 2. Left-click on the screen workspace (View Window) where you want the lettering text to appear (notice the cursor arrow has an A attached to it). 3. Type Melco on the screen. 4. Press ENTER, then double-click the lettering. 5. Click on the Column Tab. 6. Click on the arrow beneath Primary Underlay to display the pull-down menu. 7. Left-click ZigZag to select it. 8. Click OK Rev. A Tutorials - Lettering

306 292 Centering Lettering 1. Click on the Lettering tool. 2. Left-click on the screen workspace (View Window) where you want the lettering text to appear (notice the cursor arrow has an A attached to it). 3. Type Melco on the screen, then press ENTER. 4. Click the Center Design tool on the Input toolbar. 5. The lettering will now be centered. Transforming Lettering (with Base Line Types) Please follow the exercise to learn how to use this feature. 1. Click the Lettering tool. 2. Left-click on the screen workspace (View Window) where you want the lettering text to appear (notice the cursor arrow has an A attached to it). 3. Select the Athletic Block alphabet and change the letter height to.75 in the floating dialog. 4. Left-click on the screen workspace again. 5. Type Melco on the screen and press ENTER. 6. Double-click the lettering. 7. Click the Lettering tab. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

307 Select Perspective from the Base Line pull-down menu. 9. Click OK. When Perspective line type is selected, two points at the end of the base line are created. A top line is also created, with points at the ends. Drag and drop these points to add perspective to the lettering (see image below). 10. Repeat steps 6-9 with the other line types. Use the instructions starting on pg. 130 for information on using these base line types. Rotating Lettering 1. Click on the Lettering tool Rev. A Tutorials - Lettering

308 Left-click on the screen workspace (View Window) where you want your lettering text to appear (notice the cursor arrow has an A attached to it). 3. Select the Block alphabet and change the letter height to.75 in the floating dialog. 4. Left-click on the screen workspace again. 5. Type ABC on the screen and press ENTER. 6. Right-click the lettering and select Rotate from the pop-up menu. (You can also left-click the selected lettering object). This will slightly change the appearance of the selection box around the lettering (see image below). 7. Hold the mouse cursor over a corner of the box; you will see the following cursor the lettering object.. Left-click, then drag the cursor to rotate DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

309 11. TUTORIALS - DIGITIZING IN THIS CHAPTER: Scanning an Image, pg. 296 Opening a Graphic, pg. 296 Saving a Graphic, pg. 297 Scaling a Graphic, pg. 297 Hiding a Graphic, pg. 298 Setting Stitch Length, pg. 299 Turning on Retrace, pg. 300 Digitizing a Basic Walk Normal/Bean Stitch, pg. 301 Setting Density For Columns, pg. 302 Turning on Underlay, pg. 303 Digitizing a Basic Column Using Column 1, pg. 303 Digitizing a Basic Column Using Column 2, pg. 305 Digitizing a Basic Singleline, pg. 306 Digitizing a Basic Complex Fill, pg Rev. A Melco Embroidery Systems

310 296 Working with Graphics In this section we are assuming you have some digitizing experience. To complete this tutorial, we will be digitizing elements of the Earthday.bmp graphic to show you how to digitize in DesignShop using wireframe techniques. NOTE: You can only open a graphic while digitizing if you have the DesignShop Pro or DesignShop Pro + product level. Wireframe points are shown with straight or curved lines on the screen to give you a visual feedback on the shape based on the points you digitize. To see a completed version of the design, open Earthday.ofm from the \Designs folder. Working with Graphics Scanning an Image 1. Locate an image you wish to scan. 2. Open DesignShop. 3. Select File->New. 4. Click on Scan Image. 5. The Scanner drive software dialog box comes up. 6. Scan the image. 7. After scanning the image, a dialog box is displayed to save the graphic. 8. Save the graphic or cancel. Opening a Graphic 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Select File->Open. 3. The Open/Insert dialog box is displayed. 4. Click on the Files of Type drop-down menu and choose All Graphics. 5. Open Earthday.bmp from the \Design Shop\Help folder. 6. Click on Open or double-click the graphic filename. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

311 Working with Graphics Notice the graphic filename is inserted into the Project View list. Saving a Graphic 1. Scan or open a graphic in DesignShop. 2. Right-click the graphic name in the Project View. 3. Select Save As from the pop-up menu. 4. The Save Image As dialog box is displayed. 5. Type a filename. 6. Select the directory to save it in. 7. Click on Save. NOTE: Choose *.bmp, *.pcx, *.jpg, or *.tif file types. Scaling a Graphic 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open Earthday.bmp from the \Design Shop\Help folder. 3. Left-click to highlight the graphic name in the Project View. 4. The graphic will now have 8 black handles around it. 5. To scale the graphic proportionally, click on any of the four corner handles Rev. A Tutorials - Digitizing

312 298 Working with Graphics 6. To scale the graphic in the X or Y position only, click on the black handles at the top, bottom, or sides. OR 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open Earthday.bmp from \Design Shop\Help folder. 3. Right-click on the graphic name in the Project View. 4. Select Properties from the pop-up menu. NOTE: You can also double-click on the graphic to access the Scale Properties dialog box. 5. Click on the Scale tab. 6. Enter a percentage scale or specify the measurement. 7. Click on OK (or Apply). Hiding a Graphic 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open Earthday.bmp from the \Design Shop\Help folder. 3. Click on the Hide graphic tool on the View toolbar. 4. Click on the Hide graphic tool again to turn it back on. NOTE: Even if the graphic is hidden, it will still save with the project. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

313 Digitizing Color Changes/Trims 299 Digitizing Color Changes/Trims 1. At any point while digitizing, click on the Color Change tool on the toolbar, or to insert a trim click on the Trim tool. 2. Notice the Color change element or Trim element added to the Project View list. Digitizing Walk Normal Stitches or Walk Bean Setting Stitch Length 1. Open DesignShop. 2. Open Earthday.bmp from the \Design Shop\Help folder. 3. Right-click on the Walk normal or Walk bean stitch tool on the Input toolbar. 4. The Walk Element Properties box is displayed Rev. A Tutorials - Digitizing

314 300 Digitizing Walk Normal or Walk Bean Stitches 5. Change the stitch length to the desired amount. 6. Click on OK (or Apply). NOTE: The stitch length will now be set for every element you digitize from this point forward. Turning on Retrace 1. Right-click on the Walk normal (or Walk bean) stitch tool on the Input toolbar. 2. The Walk Elements Properties box is displayed. 3. Check the Retrace button to turn it on. 4. Click on OK (or Apply). DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

315 Digitizing Walk Normal or Walk Bean Stitches 301 NOTE: The retrace will start from the last input point and retrace back to the first input point. Digitizing a Basic Walk Normal/Bean Stitch Open Earthday.bmp from the \Design Shop\Help folder. 1. Left-click either the Walk normal or Walk bean stitch tool on the Input toolbar. 2. Digitize a walk stitch around the sun in the open graphic. (You may need to zoom in on the sun). Digitize the stitch using input reference points to mark the area of where the stitches will be placed (steps 1 through 5 in the following image). The Status line will give input prompts to follow throughout the process. Read the following tips before starting. The left-click on the mouse is used to insert a straight input point. A triangle represents each straight point. The right mouse button is used to insert a curved input point. A circle represents each curved point. Always start with the left-click. In this exercise, you will need to alternate between left-click and right-clicks because the shape is curved. Notice the wireframe outlines that form on the screen while digitizing. If you make a mistake or click too many points, simply press the BACKSPACE key on your keyboard to delete the last input point. Each time the BACKSPACE key is pressed, the input points will be deleted in sequence. 3. When you are finished digitizing the shape, press the ENTER key on the keyboard. 4. Notice the stitches on the screen as well as the element created in the Project View Rev. A Tutorials - Digitizing

316 302 Digitizing Column Stitches Digitizing Column Stitches Setting Density For Columns Open Earthday.bmp from the \Design Shop\Help folder. 1. Right-click on the Column 1, Column 2 or any Singleline tool on the Input toolbar. 2. The Column Element Properties box is displayed. 3. Change the Density to the desired amount or turn on Auto- Density. 4. Click on OK (or Apply). DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

317 Digitizing Column Stitches 303 NOTE: The Density will now be set for every element you digitize from this point forward. Turning on Underlay 1. Right-click the Column 1, Column 2, or Singleline Center tool on the Input toolbar. 2. The Column Element Properties box is displayed. 3. Click on the down arrow to access Primary Underlay types. 4. Choose Edge Walk, Center Walk or Zigzag as an underlay type. 5. Click on OK (or Apply). NOTE: The underlay will now be set for every element digitized forward. Digitizing a Basic Column Using Column 1 Open Earthday.bmp from the \Design Shop\Help folder. 1. Left-click the Column 1 tool on the Input toolbar. An alternative way is to click with the right mouse button anywhere on the View Window (work area) and select the tool from the pop-up menu Rev. A Tutorials - Digitizing

318 304 Digitizing Column Stitches 2. The Satin stitch tool will automatically be activated on the Input toolbar. NOTE: Columns are usually digitized with satin stitches. However, other stitch types are available: Zigzag, E stitch, or Fill. Digitize the outline of the tallest mountain in the open graphic. These input points must be placed on alternate sides of the column with left-clicks. (Follow steps 1 through 10 in the example on the next page). The Status Line will give input prompts to follow throughout the process. Read the following tips before starting: The left-click on the mouse is used to insert a straight input point. A triangle represents each straight point. Always start with the left click. This is similar to digitizing with mark points in that you must have even numbers of points on alternate sides of the column. Notice the wireframe outlines that form on the screen as you digitize. If they cross, they will show an X and you will get a bow tie effect of the stitching. If you make a mistake or click too many points, simply press the BACKSPACE key on the keyboard to delete the last input point. Each time the BACKSPACE key is pressed, the input points will be deleted in sequence. 3. When you are finished digitizing the column, press the ENTER key on the keyboard. 4. Notice the stitches on the screen as well as the element created in the Project View. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

319 Digitizing Column Stitches 305 Digitizing a Basic Column Using Column 2 Open Earthday.bmp from the \Design Shop\Help folder. 1. Left-click the Column 2 tool on the Input tool bar. An alternative way is to click with your right mouse button anywhere on the View Window (work area) and selecting the tool from the pop-up menu. 2. The Satin stitch tool will automatically be activated on the Input toolbar. NOTE: Columns are usually digitized with satin stitches. However, other stitch types are available: Zigzag, E stitch, or a Fill. The exit point can be placed on the opposite side of the last digitized point at digitize time by holding CTRL while you press ENTER to end the column. 3. Digitize the area directly under the trees in the graphic. (Follow steps 1 through 9 in the following image). The Status Line will give input prompts to follow throughout the process. Read the following tips before starting: The left-click on the mouse is used to insert a straight input point. A triangle represents each straight point. The right mouse button is used to insert a curved input point. A circle represents each curved point. In this example you will need to use alternating straight and curved points Rev. A Tutorials - Digitizing

320 306 Digitizing Column Stitches Always start with the left-click. In this exercise you will digitize one side of the column (steps 1 through 5 in the following image), press the ENTER key, and then starting from the top, digitize the other side (steps 6 through 9 in the following image). Notice the wireframe outlines that form on the screen as you digitize. If you make a mistake or click too many points, simply press the backspace key on the keyboard to delete the last input point. Each time the backspace key is pressed, the input points will be deleted in sequence. 4. When you are finished digitizing the column, press the ENTER key on the keyboard. Notice the stitches on the screen as well as the element created in the Project View. Digitizing a Basic Singleline Open Earthday.bmp from the \Design Shop\Help folder. 1. Left-click any of the Singleline center, left or right tools on the Input toolbar. An alternative way is to click with the right mouse button anywhere on the View Window (work area) and select the tool from the pop-up menu. 2. The Satin stitch tool will automatically be activated on the Input toolbar. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

321 Digitizing Column Stitches 307 NOTE: Columns are usually digitized with satin stitches. However, other stitch types are available: Zigzag, E stitch, or a Fill. 3. Digitize the outline around the graphic (steps 1 through 5 in the following image). If you choose Center, you will need to digitize down the center of the column. The Status Line will give input prompts to follow throughout the process. Read the following tips before starting. The left-click on the mouse is used to insert a straight input point. A triangle represents each straight point. The right mouse button is used to insert a curved input point. A circle represents each curved point. In this example you will need to use alternating straight and curved points. You must always start with the left click. Notice the wireframe outlines that form on the screen as you digitize. If you make a mistake or click too many points, simply press the BACKSPACE key on the keyboard to delete the last input point. Each time the BACKSPACE key is pressed, the input points will be deleted in sequence. 4. When you are finished digitizing the column, press the ENTER key on the keyboard. 5. Enter the first width point of the column using the left mouse button (step 6 in the following image). 6. Enter the second width point of the column using the left mouse button again to give it the width (step 7 in the following image). Digitize the column width points anywhere on your screen. 7. Notice the stitches on the screen as well as the element it created in the Project View Rev. A Tutorials - Digitizing

322 308 Digitizing Column Stitches Changing Singleline Column Width To specify the exact width for any Singleline column (before digitizing a singleline columns): 1. Right-click on any of the Singleline tools on the Input toolbar. 2. The Element Properties box is displayed. 3. Click on the Singleline tab. 4. Define the exact column width in the space provided. 5. Click on OK (or Apply). 6. Digitize the Singleline column. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

323 Digitizing Complex Fills When the status line prompts you to enter the column width, press the ENTER key. Digitizing Complex Fills Digitizing a Basic Complex Fill Open Earthday.bmp from the \Design Shop\Help folder. 1. Left-click the Complex fill tool on the Input toolbar. 2. The Fill stitch will automatically be activated. 3. In this exercise you will digitize the sky in the open graphic. First, digitize the fill using input reference points to mark the area where the stitches will be placed (steps 1 through 6 in the image below). The Status Line will give input prompts to follow throughout the process. Read the following tips before starting: The left-click on the mouse is used to insert a straight input point. A triangle represents each straight point. The right mouse button is used to insert a curved input point. A circle represents each curved point. You must always start with the left-click. In this exercise you will need to alternate between left-clicks and right-clicks because the shape is curved. Notice the wireframe outlines that form on the screen as you digitize. If you make a mistake or click too many points, simply press the backspace key on the keyboard to delete the last input point. Each time the backspace key is pressed, the input points will be deleted in sequence. 4. Press the ENTER key on the keyboard when finished with the first outline. NOTE: After you press ENTER, the status line will prompt you through the next steps to complete the Complex fill Rev. A Tutorials - Digitizing

324 310 Digitizing Complex Fills 5. Digitize the second outline (hole) using left or right clicks (steps 7 through 13 in the example below). 6. Press ENTER. 7. Digitize the third outline (hole) using left or right clicks (steps 14 through 21 in the image below). 8. Press ENTER. 9. When all the outlines are complete, press ENTER. 10. Digitize the Complex fill entry point using the left click (step 22 in the image below). 11. Digitize the Complex fill exit point using the left click (step 23 in the image below). 12. Digitize two points for the stitch direction using the left click (steps 24 & 25 in the example below). 13. Notice the stitches on the screen as well as the element it created in the Project View. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

325 12. TUTORIALS - TOOLS IN THIS CHAPTER: Group Sewing, pg. 312 Auto-Digitizing, pg Rev. A Melco Embroidery Systems

326 312 Group Sewing Group Sewing This feature is most commonly used to individualize uniforms for members of sports teams or corporate uniforms. The group names can be stored in a variety of different ways. This tool is only available in DesignShop and higher product levels. To Create Group Names 1. Open a new screen in DesignShop. 2. Click the Lettering toolbar button (or select Insert->Lettering). 3. Left-click in the View Window; you will see a blinking cursor. 4. Press ENTER. The Lettering properties tab will be displayed. NOTE: The Group Names will pick up the properties from the current settings in the lettering parameters. 5. Choose the desired text values for the Group Names (example: Alphabet style, letter height, Column width, etc). 6. To turn on Group Names, left-click in the checkbox next to Group Names, then click applied).. (Any changes you made in Step 5 will be DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

327 Group Sewing The Group Names properties dialog will be displayed. 8. Select the Design, Name, Design, Name option from the output options pull-down menu. 9. Click on the Add Button. This will make a small edit window available to immediately type each name. Type a list of five names, separated by commas into that window. (Example; John Jones, Greg Smith, Paul Johnson). After entering each name, click on the Add button again to insert the name into the Available Names list. 10. Once all the names have been added to the list, click the All button (>>) to move all the names to the Selected Names box. 11. Left-click the Both radio button. This will sew the first and last names in your list. The names displayed in the Selected Name list are the names that will sew. Even if only using the first name, always store the first and last name for added flexibility at a later time. 12. Click on OK to close the Group Names dialog and apply your changes. 13. Click on OK to close the Lettering dialog and apply your changes. 14. Select File->Save As. 15. Type the filename and desired directory to save in Rev. A Tutorials - Tools

328 314 Auto-Digitizing 16. Select expanded for the file type. 17. Click on OK. NOTE: The name that is highlighted in the Selected Name list will display in the layout screen. 18. Click on File->Close to close the design. 19. Re-open the design in DesignShop. 20. The design will open with the names on top of each other with color changes added. 21. Send the file to the machine. 22. When programming the design to sew, use a P as Color 1 (in the machine Color menu) to force the machine to stop after sewing each name. This will enable you to insert the next hoop and press start to sew the next name. (Melco embroidery machines only) Auto-Digitizing This tool is only available in DesignShop Pro and DesignShop Pro Open melco_tutor.tif (found in the \Design Shop\Help folder). 2. Click the Convert Graphic toolbar button. 3. You will see the following dialog. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

329 Auto-Digitizing 315 For this exercise you do not need to adjust the settings in this dialog. (See the Auto-Digitizing chapter, pg. 244, for more information on this dialog). 4. Click OK. 5. Notice in the tree view that the graphic has been converted to embroidery data. Click the view in 3D button design will look when it is sewn. to see how the Rev. A Tutorials - Tools

330 316 Auto-Digitizing DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

331 13. TUTORIALS - MORE PRACTICE IN THIS CHAPTER: Digitize a column 1 using straight points, pg. 318 Digitize a column 1 using curved and straight points, pg. 319 Digitize a column 2 using curved and straight points, pg. 320 Digitize singleline columns using straight points, pg. 322 Digitize singleline columns using curved and straight points, pg. 323 Complex Fill and Complex Hole, pg. 324 Creating Pattern Fills, pg. 327 Digitize a walk stitch using curved and straight points, pg. 329 Digitize a manual stitch, pg. 331 Creating Decorative Stitches, pg. 331 Creating Radial Out Fills, pg. 333 Creating Vantage Fills, pg. 335 Creating Wave Fills, pg. 336 Creating Double-Wave Fills, pg Rev. A Melco Embroidery Systems

332 318 Columns Columns Digitize a column 1 using straight points Insert melco_tutor.tif (from Design Shop\Help). Zoom in on the M in Melco. Keep in mind that the stitch list order is the same order the machine will perform the sew-out. Select the column 1 element. 1. Input your first point by left-clicking in the View Window over the graphic, which will input a straight point. 2. Now input the second point parallel to the first input point. 3. Input the third point on the same side of the column as your first input point. The exit point can be placed on the opposite side of the last digitized point at digitize time by holding CTRL while you press ENTER to end the column. 4. Input the fourth point parallel to the third point. (These steps are illustrated below.) Now press the ENTER key to complete your wireframe column and generate stitches. This is the simplest type of column. The end result after stitching these two columns (and clicking the View Stitches in 3D button) will look like this: DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

333 Columns 319 Digitize a column 1 using curved and straight points A simple example of this would be to digitize the letter c. 1. Input your first straight point (by left-clicking). 2. Input your second straight point parallel to the first (left-click). 3. Input the third point half way around the c on the same side of the column as your first input point; this point will be a curved point that you input by right-clicking. 4. Input another curved point (right-click) on the opposite side of the column, parallel to the third point. 5. Input the fifth point at the end of the c on the same side of the column as the first and third. This will be a straight point that you will input by left-clicking. 6. Input the final point on the opposite side of the column, parallel to the fifth point. This will be another straight point that you will get by left clicking. Press the ENTER key when you are finished. This example is illustrated in the following image: When digitizing something like a capital M, you will want to plan ahead on what column goes first. For example you may want to stitch out the V area of the capital M before the straight column on the sides of the capital M. By digitizing in that order, the V area columns will lay under the straight columns Rev. A Tutorials - More Practice

334 320 Columns but- The end result after clicking the View Stitches in 3D ton, looks like this: Digitize a column 2 using curved and straight points Select the column 2 element. A column 2 is digitized by inputting the curved and straight points on one side of the column first, then pressing the ENTER key. Then you input the curved and straight points on the opposite side of the column. When finished, press the ENTER key to complete the column 2. In the same graphic that was used for the above columns, there is a stem of a flower. It is a good idea to think about the sewing order of DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

335 Columns 321 things before beginning this column. In this example, you will probably want to sew the flower stem from the bottom up so that you can go into the next element easier. Leftclick to input straight points, right-click to input curved points. 1 - straight 2 - curved 3 - straight 4 - curved 5 - straight 6 - straight 7 - straight 8 - curved 9 - straight 10 - straight 11 - curved 12 - straight 13 - curved 14 - straight 15 - straight 16 - curved 17 - straight Press ENTER when you are finished. The end result after clicking the View Stitches in 3D button looks like this: Rev. A Tutorials - More Practice

336 322 Columns Digitize singleline columns using straight points When digitizing, keep in mind that the stitch list order is the same order that the machine will perform the sew-out. Select a singleline element. In this exercise you will digitize a rectangle: 1. Input your first point by left-clicking in the View Window, which will input a straight point. 2. Input a second straight point (left-click). Press the ENTER key to complete the singleline. 3. Now you have to determine the width of the column that you are digitizing. Left-click to enter the first width point. 4. Move your cursor from the first point to the desired width and left-click again to insert the second width point. This exercise is illustrated in the image below. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

337 Columns 323 For this example, it didn't matter where the width points were placed, but if you are digitizing over a graphic (and need to be precise) you may want to place your width points over the graphic. Digitize singleline columns using curved and straight points To digitize a circle: 1. Input your first point by left-clicking in the View Window; this will input a straight point. 2. Input a curved point 1/4 of the way around the circle by rightclicking. 3. Input a straight point 1/2 of the way around the circle by leftclicking. 4. Input a curved point 3/4 of the way around the circle with a rightclick. 5. Input the final point a slightly past the first point to ensure that the stitches meet up when sewn out. The final point should be a straight point that you get by left-clicking. When the wireframe outline is completed click the ENTER key. 6. Now enter the first width point by left-clicking Rev. A Tutorials - More Practice

338 324 Complex Fills 7. Determine the desired width and place your cursor that distance from the first width point and left click to enter another width point. This exercise is illustrated in the following image. Complex Fills Complex Fill and Complex Hole This exercise will demonstrate how to digitize a complex fill and then insert a hole. When digitizing complex fills, you should always begin and end your wireframe outline with straight points. Insert melco_tutor.tif from C:\ Design Shop\Help. Zoom in on the flower in the graphic. Keep in mind that the stitch list order is the same order the machine will perform during the sew-out. Select the complex fill element. (This exercise is illustrated in the following image). 1. Input your 1st point by left-clicking in the View Window over the graphic. This will input a straight point. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

339 Complex Fills The 2nd point for this example is a curved point that you input by right-clicking. 3. straight 4. curved 5. straight 6. curved 7. straight 8. straight 9. curved 10. straight 11. straight 12. straight 13. curved After inputting the last point of the complex fill, press the ENTER key. Now, if you had any holes to input in the complex fill you could digitize the wireframe outline of these the same way that you digitized the wireframe outline of the complex fill. Because you don't have any holes to digitize in this exercise, press the ENTER key again. 14. Input the complex fill entry point with a left-click. The entry point is where you would like the stitches to begin on the complex fill. 15. Input the complex fill exit point with a left-click. The exit point is where you would like the stitches to tie off and end the complex fill. 16. Input the first direction point with a left-click. 17. Input the second direction point with a left-click. The direction of the line between the two direction points determines the direction of the fill stitches on the complex fill just digitized. The stitches will now be generated on the complex fill. The direction points can be anywhere in the View Window (inside or outside of the complex fill) Rev. A Tutorials - More Practice

340 326 Complex Fills The end result after clicking the View Stitches in 3D looks like this. button Digitize a complex hole After completing the complex fill on the rose petal, you may decide you would like to put a shadow of a slightly darker color using stitches going in a different direction. You wouldn't want to put another fill on top of the existing one because you will have too many stitches on top of each other; therefore you want to insert a hole. NOTE: You can also use holes on areas that are supposed to be blank or not filled in with stitches. 1. Select the complex fill by left-clicking inside of it, if it is not already selected. You can tell an element is selected if it has a box around it and the wireframe points are shown. 2. Select the complex hole tool. 3. Digitize the outline of the hole that you want to create. Use the left mouse click for straight points and right mouse click for curved points. 4. When finished with the outline, press the ENTER key. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

341 Complex Fills 327 The end result of the above complex fill with a hole inserted looks like this: On the example of the rose petal, a color change was inserted and a column fill was then stitched over the hole. The end result of that looks like this: Creating Pattern Fills 1. To create a pattern fill, select Custom->Create Pattern Fill. A screen will pop up to allow you to create the pattern fill Rev. A Tutorials - More Practice

342 328 Complex Fills 2. Zoom in if needed and turn on the grid to be more exact. 3. Select walk stitch as the input tool that you would like to digitize with. Follow the basic digitizing rules and complete the following steps. 4. After selecting walk stitch, digitize a diamond shape using straight input points (using left-clicks). (See Steps 1-5 in the image below.) 5. Press the ENTER key. 6. Digitize another diamond shape with the walk element, inputting straight points. (See Steps 6-10 in the image below.) 7. Press the ENTER key. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

343 Walk stitches 329 Once you are finished creating your pattern fill, you, name it and click OK. It will then be added to the pattern fill list that you can choose from within the Fill property page. Walk stitches Digitize a walk stitch using curved and straight points Insert melco_tutor.tif from Design Shop\Help. Zoom in on the e in Melco. Keep in mind that the stitch list order is the same order the machine will perform the sew-out. Select the walk stitch input tool. 1. First, digitize the outline inside of the letter e. The first input point is a straight point (left-click) on the bottom left side of the outline. 2. Now input a straight point on the right side on the bottom. 3. Input a curved point (right-click) on the top of the curve. 4. Input the final point in the same place as the first point. Press the ENTER key to complete the outline Rev. A Tutorials - More Practice

344 330 Walk stitches 5. Now digitize the outline around the outside of the letter e. 1. straight 2. curved 3. straight 4. straight 5. curved 6. straight 7. curved 8. straight 9. straight The end result after clicking the View Stitches in 3D button looks like this: DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

345 Walk stitches 331 Digitize a manual stitch You can only use straight points for digitizing a manual stitch. This type of element is usually used for items where you want to be able to determine where your needle penetrations are. Maybe you would like to have the look of a long stitch without changing the stitch length on your walk stitch. An example of when to use a manual stitch element would be when digitizing grass. When representing blades of grass with thread, you may not necessarily want needle penetrations throughout the blades of grass. Practice the manual stitch by digitizing blades of grass: 1. Left-click the manual stitch shortcut button. 2. Left-click to input the first needle point. 3. Left-click again (above the first input point) to input the second needle point. 4. Left-click slightly to the right of the first input point. 5. Press the ENTER key to end the manual stitch element. 6. Repeat steps 1-5 to create more blades of grass. Creating Decorative Stitches To create a decorative stitch, open the Custom Menu and select Create Decorative Stitch (Custom->Create Decorative Stitch). A screen will pop up where you will create your decorative stitch Rev. A Tutorials - More Practice

346 332 Walk stitches Zoom in if needed and turn on the grid to be more exact. Select Walk Stitch as the input tool that you would like to digitize with. Follow the basic digitizing rules. NOTE: It is very important that you start and end your element on the Stitch Line. If you end somewhere above or below the line, another stitch will be automatically generated for you to the stitch line and you may not get the desired decorative stitch. It is also very important to remember that you cannot begin and end your stitch in the same place. Complete the steps illustrated in the following image: DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

347 Creating Radial Out Fills Start on the Stitch Line by inputting a straight point Input straight points. 6. Input last point on the Stitch Line and not on the same point as the first input point. 7. Press ENTER. Once you are finished creating your decorative stitch, name it then click OK. It will then be added to the decorative stitch list that you can choose from within the Walk Stitch and Fill property pages. Creating Radial Out Fills 1. Start a new design. 2. Left-click the complex fill tool. 3. Left-click the decorative fill button. 4. Choose any decorative stitch (such as Bows). 5. Click OK. 6. Digitize a relatively large circle (so that you can see the distortion effect) Rev. A Tutorials - More Practice

348 334 Creating Radial Out Fills 7. Click the Edit Mode button. 8. Double-click the fill you just digitized. 9. Click the Effects button. 10. Select Radial Out from the Distortion Effects pull-down menu, then click OK. 11. Click OK in the Complex Fill Properties dialog. The Radial Out effect will be applied to the fill. 12. Place the mouse cursor over the point in the center of the circle (called the globe center). Left-click and hold the left mouse button. You can now drag the point around to change the Radial Out effect. (You can also move the location of the radius point on the outside of the circle). globe center radius point NOTE: To create Radial In fills, repeat the above steps, selecting Radial In in the Distortion Effects pull-down menu. DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

349 Creating Vantage Fills 335 Creating Vantage Fills 1. Start a new design. 2. Left-click the complex fill tool. 3. Left-click the decorative fill button. 4. Choose any decorative stitch (such as Bows). 5. Click OK. 6. Digitize a triangle. Input a horizontal stitch direction. 7. Double-click the triangle you just digitized. 8. Click the Effects button. 9. Under Distortion Effects, select Vantage Fill from the pulldown menu. 10. Click OK. 11. Click OK to close the Complex Fill Properties dialog. 12. You will now see a box around complex fill, in addition to the selection box. Resize one edge of the effect box (by selecting and dragging the corners) to make it shorter than the opposite edge. This creates the perspective effect that makes it appear that the smaller stitches are farther away Rev. A Tutorials - More Practice

350 336 Creating Wave Fills Creating Wave Fills 1. Start a new design. 2. Left-click the complex fill tool. 3. Left-click the standard fill tool. 4. Choose any standard fill (such as Fill 8), then click OK. 5. Digitize a circle. 6. Position the mouse over the stitch direction line. 7. Input one or more straight (left-click) or curved (right-click) points. 8. Select a point on the stitch direction line and move it to the desired location. The stitch direction will reflect the changes to the stitch direction line. (See the example below). DesignShop Manual Melco Embroidery Systems

Release Notes and Installation Instructions for DesignShop 2004 Version Release

Release Notes and Installation Instructions for DesignShop 2004 Version Release June, 2004 Important! DesignShop Changes Release Notes and Installation Instructions for DesignShop 2004 Version 5.07.023 Release 012704.0 This document contains information about DesignShop Version 5.07.023

More information

Melco. AutoFont User Guide for Embroidery Font Creation. AutoFont converts... Embroidery Systems A Saurer Group Company. Letters.

Melco. AutoFont User Guide for Embroidery Font Creation. AutoFont converts... Embroidery Systems A Saurer Group Company. Letters. AutoFont User Guide for Embroidery Font Creation AutoFont converts... To Letters Lettering Automatic Alphabet generation for EDS III Convenient controls Powerful editing tools Compatible with TrueType

More information

Release Notes and Installation Instructions for AMAYA OS 2004 Version Release

Release Notes and Installation Instructions for AMAYA OS 2004 Version Release September, 2004 Release Notes and Installation Instructions for AMAYA OS 2004 Version 5.07.043 Release 092104.0 Important! Please read this document before installing AMAYA OS. This document contains information

More information

Release Notes and Installation Instructions for AMAYA OS 2004 Version Release

Release Notes and Installation Instructions for AMAYA OS 2004 Version Release January, 2004 Release Notes and Installation Instructions for AMAYA OS 2004 Version 5.07.023 Release 012704.1 Important! This document contains information about AMAYA OS Version 5.07.023, Release 012704.1

More information

Contents Toolbox Tools Standard Tools View 4 Add Design Select 4 Edit 4 Lettering 6 Monogram 7 Design Colors Sew Sequence Bounding Box

Contents Toolbox Tools Standard Tools View 4 Add Design Select 4 Edit 4 Lettering 6 Monogram 7 Design Colors Sew Sequence Bounding Box Help Contents Toolbox Tools 3 Standard Tools 4 View 4 Add Design 4 Select 4 Edit 4 Lettering 6 Monogram 7 Design Colors 7 Sew Sequence 7 Bounding Box 8 Shortcuts 9 Install Toolbox on your Windows Computer

More information

USER GUIDE DESIGN LAYOUTS

USER GUIDE DESIGN LAYOUTS USER GUIDE DESIGN LAYOUTS Introduction COPYRIGHT Copyright 1998-2016. Wilcom Pty Ltd, Wilcom International Pty Ltd. All Rights reserved. All title and copyrights in and to Digitizer Embroidery Software

More information

FILE MENU New Starts a New Blank Canvas Open- Allows you to import designs into the program. Close- Closes the current Design

FILE MENU New Starts a New Blank Canvas Open- Allows you to import designs into the program. Close- Closes the current Design 1 Quick Start Guide This guide is intended to give you an overview of the function of the program. The guide is arranged by section, Each section corresponds to the different pulldown menus in the program.

More information

Operation Manual for the EDS EZ Design Software

Operation Manual for the EDS EZ Design Software Operation Manual for the EDS EZ Design Software A Melco Embroidery Design System for use with Microsoft Windows 95 or Windows 98 Part Number 10268 Revision B 1575 West 124th Avenue Denver, Colorado 80234

More information

Amazing Designs Apps Instruction Manual

Amazing Designs Apps Instruction Manual Amazing Designs Apps Instruction Manual Amazing Designs Apps is a new embroidery software system from Amazing Designs that contains multiple features, in different toolpacks that are activated separately.

More information

Trademarks. Installing TES Viewer:

Trademarks. Installing TES Viewer: User s Manual Viewer Trademarks BARUDAN has made all possible efforts to supply trademark information about company names, products and services mentioned in this manual. Trademarks indicated below were

More information

Operation Manual for the EDS EZ Design Software

Operation Manual for the EDS EZ Design Software Operation Manual for the EDS EZ Design Software A Melco Embroidery Design System for use with Microsoft Windows 3.x or Windows 95 Part Number 110285-01, Revision B A Saurer Group Company 1575 West 124th

More information

Roland CutChoice. Ver. 1 USER S MANUAL

Roland CutChoice. Ver. 1 USER S MANUAL Roland CutChoice Ver. 1 USER S MANUAL Thank you very much for purchasing the Roland cutter. To ensure correct and safe usage with a full understanding of this product s performance, please be sure to read

More information

vippaq Main App. User Guide

vippaq Main App. User Guide vippaq Main App. User Guide Edition 1d July 2008 Contents 1 INTRODUCTION 3 1.1 3 2 SYSTEM PREPARATION 4 2.1.1 Measuring Head Connection 5 2.1.2 Position the Measuring Heads 5 2.1.3 Start Job 5 3 MEASURE

More information

KP Compositions User s Guide

KP Compositions User s Guide KP Compositions User s Guide COPYRIGHT Copyright 2006 Pulse Microsystems Ltd. All rights reserved. This KP Compositions User s Guide and the KP Compositions software are copyrighted by the developer of

More information

SmartScan. Barcode Translator for QuickBooks USER S MANUAL

SmartScan. Barcode Translator for QuickBooks USER S MANUAL SmartScan Barcode Translator for QuickBooks USER S MANUAL Baus Systems 4727 44 th Ave. SW, Suite 202 Seattle, WA 98116 (206) 932-9986 Office (206) 923-0839 Fax E-mail: support@baus-systems.com 1 TABLE

More information

OfficeServ Link User Manual

OfficeServ Link User Manual OfficeServ Link User Manual Every effort has been made to eliminate errors and ambiguities in the information contained in this guide. Any questions concerning information presented here should be directed

More information

Quick Start Guide for EOS / TES

Quick Start Guide for EOS / TES 1 Quick Start Guide for EOS / TES (If you are not comfortable with the basic functions of a computer, seek local assistance before proceeding.) How to install EOS/TES Important: for Windows 2000 or XP

More information

ME scopeves 5.0. Reference Manual. Volume IIA Basic Operations. (August 2008)

ME scopeves 5.0. Reference Manual. Volume IIA Basic Operations. (August 2008) ME scopeves 5.0 Reference Manual Volume IIA Basic Operations (August 2008) i ME'scope Reference Volume IIA - Basic Operations ii Table Of Contents Notice Information in this document is subject to change

More information

IMAGE STUDIO LITE. Tutorial Guide Featuring Image Studio Analysis Software Version 3.1

IMAGE STUDIO LITE. Tutorial Guide Featuring Image Studio Analysis Software Version 3.1 IMAGE STUDIO LITE Tutorial Guide Featuring Image Studio Analysis Software Version 3.1 Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. LI-COR MAKES NO WARRANTY OF

More information

SensView User Guide. Version 1.0 February 8, Copyright 2010 SENSR LLC. All Rights Reserved. R V1.0

SensView User Guide. Version 1.0 February 8, Copyright 2010 SENSR LLC. All Rights Reserved. R V1.0 SensView User Guide Version 1.0 February 8, 2010 Copyright 2010 SENSR LLC. All Rights Reserved. R001-419-V1.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 PREAMBLE 3 1.1 Software License Agreement 3 2 INSTALLING SENSVIEW 5 2.1

More information

Daniel MeterLink Software v1.40

Daniel MeterLink Software v1.40 Quick Start Manual P/N 3-9000-763, Rev K June 2017 Daniel MeterLink Software v1.40 for Daniel Gas and Liquid Ultrasonic Flow Meters Software License Agreement PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

More information

SonicWALL CDP 2.1 Agent Tool User's Guide

SonicWALL CDP 2.1 Agent Tool User's Guide COMPREHENSIVE INTERNET SECURITY b SonicWALL CDP Series Appliances SonicWALL CDP 2.1 Agent Tool User's Guide SonicWALL CDP Agent Tool User s Guide Version 2.0 SonicWALL, Inc. 1143 Borregas Avenue Sunnyvale,

More information

A Study of Angles & Curves

A Study of Angles & Curves A Study of Angles & Curves Method 1: Cutting Quilt Shapes/Using the Shapes Tools Open BERNINA CutWork Software. Make sure that Create New is selected. Click Next. Place a dot in front of New Graphic. Select

More information

FlukeView. Users Manual. Software for ScopeMeter Test Tools

FlukeView. Users Manual. Software for ScopeMeter Test Tools FlukeView Software for ScopeMeter Test Tools Users Manual January 2016 2016 Fluke Corporation. All rights reserved. All product names are trademarks of their respective companies. License Agreement 2006-2016

More information

Ludlum Lumic Data Logger Software Manual Version 1.1.xx

Ludlum Lumic Data Logger Software Manual Version 1.1.xx Ludlum Lumic Data Logger Software Manual Version 1.1.xx Ludlum Lumic Data Logger Software Manual Version 1.1.xx Contents Introduction... 1 Software License Agreement... 2 Getting Started... 5 Minimum

More information

IterisXPetraPro Software User Manual

IterisXPetraPro Software User Manual IterisXPetraPro Software User Manual 493078901 Rev. A October 2008 I IterisXPetraPro User Guide Table of Contents Part I Software Legal Notes 1 Part II Introduction 3 1 Program... Requirements Part III

More information

CX Recorder. User Guide. Version 1.0 February 8, Copyright 2010 SENSR LLC. All Rights Reserved. R V1.0

CX Recorder. User Guide. Version 1.0 February 8, Copyright 2010 SENSR LLC. All Rights Reserved. R V1.0 CX Recorder User Guide Version 1.0 February 8, 2010 Copyright 2010 SENSR LLC. All Rights Reserved. R001-418-V1.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 PREAMBLE 3 1.1 Software License Agreement 3 2 INSTALLING CXRECORDER

More information

Manual NEWBASE WebShot 1.4. Copyright by NEWBASE GmbH, Hamburg, Germany

Manual NEWBASE WebShot 1.4. Copyright by NEWBASE GmbH, Hamburg, Germany Manual NEWBASE WebShot 1.4 Copyright by NEWBASE GmbH, Hamburg, Germany Table of contents Copyright... 3 NEWBASE License Agreement... 3 Maintenance... 4 Manual Conventions... 5 Installation 6 Starting and

More information

Getting Started (No installation necessary) Windows On Windows systems, simply double click the AntGram icon to launch the program.

Getting Started (No installation necessary) Windows On Windows systems, simply double click the AntGram icon to launch the program. AntGram (Windows) Build 1.0 (Released September 22, 2018) Laurence Anthony, Ph.D. Center for English Language Education in Science and Engineering, School of Science and Engineering, Waseda University,

More information

Quick Start Guide. Model 0260 Secondary Electronics

Quick Start Guide. Model 0260 Secondary Electronics Quick Start Guide Brooks Model 0260 Secondary Electronics 5 Quick Start Guide Dear Customer, The Brooks Smart Interface is a Microsoft Windows based software application that provides expanded control

More information

IPNexus Server Secure Instant Messaging & Integrated Collaboration

IPNexus Server Secure Instant Messaging & Integrated Collaboration IPNexus Server Secure Instant Messaging & Integrated Collaboration Version 1.5 Installation & Setup Guide DOC00023 Rev. 1.0 01.03 VCON IPNexus Server Installation & Setup Guide 1 2003 VCON Ltd. All Rights

More information

NDA ISSUE 1 STOCK # MATWorX 32 User s Guide. December, NEC America, Inc.

NDA ISSUE 1 STOCK # MATWorX 32 User s Guide. December, NEC America, Inc. NDA-24215 ISSUE 1 STOCK # 151942 MATWorX 32 User s Guide December, 1997 NEC America, Inc. LIABILITY DISCLAIMER NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features,

More information

FlukeView Forms. Documenting Software. Getting Started

FlukeView Forms. Documenting Software. Getting Started FlukeView Forms Documenting Software Getting Started PN 1574021 September 2000 2000 Fluke Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in USA All product names are trademarks of their respective companies.

More information

Getting Started (No installation necessary) Windows On Windows systems, simply double click the AntPConc icon to launch the program.

Getting Started (No installation necessary) Windows On Windows systems, simply double click the AntPConc icon to launch the program. AntPConc (Windows) Build 1.2.0 (Released March 25, 2017) Laurence Anthony, Ph.D. Center for English Language Education in Science and Engineering, School of Science and Engineering, Waseda University,

More information

Software User's Guide

Software User's Guide Software User's Guide The contents of this guide and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice. Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications

More information

Getting Started (No installation necessary)

Getting Started (No installation necessary) ProtAnt (Windows) Build 1.2.1 (Released March 21, 2017) Laurence Anthony, Ph.D. Center for English Language Education in Science and Engineering, School of Science and Engineering, Waseda University, 3-4-1

More information

EYER hybrid User Guide

EYER hybrid User Guide EYER hybrid User Guide www.zew3d.com Index Section: INTRODUCTION 1. Welcome...4 What is EYER and what does it make...4 What is new in EYER Hybrid...4 2. About ZEW...5 3. System requirements...6 4. Installation...7

More information

Contents. Notice. System Requirements. User Notice. Copyright. Software installation. FAT32 Format Utility. One Button File Backup.

Contents. Notice. System Requirements. User Notice. Copyright. Software installation. FAT32 Format Utility. One Button File Backup. Contents Notice System Requirements User Notice Copyright Software installation FAT32 Format Utility One Button File Backup Quick Launch Quick File Backup File Backup File Backup File Restore Erase File

More information

Release Notes and Installation Instructions for AMAYA OS Version Release

Release Notes and Installation Instructions for AMAYA OS Version Release September, 2003 Release Notes and Installation Instructions for AMAYA OS Version 4.02.041 Release 072403.0 Important! This document contains information about AMAYA OS Version 4.02.041, Release 072403.0

More information

Studio Manager. for / Installation Guide. Keep This Manual For Future Reference.

Studio Manager. for / Installation Guide. Keep This Manual For Future Reference. Studio Manager for / Installation Guide Keep This Manual For Future Reference. E i Important Information Exclusion of Certain Liability Trademarks Copyright Manufacturer, importer, or dealer shall not

More information

MANUAL NO. OPS647-UM-151 USER S MANUAL

MANUAL NO. OPS647-UM-151 USER S MANUAL MANUAL NO. OPS647-UM-151 USER S MANUAL Software Usage Agreement Graphtec Corporation ( Graphtec ) hereby grants the purchaser and authorized User (the User ) the right to use the software (the Software

More information

Welcome to Windows 10 Manager

Welcome to Windows 10 Manager Welcome to Windows 10 Manager Software Introduction http://www.yamicsoft.com contact@yamicsoft.com support@yamicsoft.com suggestion@yamicsoft.com Software Introduction Welcome to Windows 10 Manager and

More information

Windows Me Navigating

Windows Me Navigating LAB PROCEDURE 11 Windows Me Navigating OBJECTIVES 1. Explore the Start menu. 2. Start an application. 3. Multi-task between applications. 4. Moving folders and files around. 5. Use Control Panel settings.

More information

USB Server User Manual

USB Server User Manual 1 Copyright Notice Copyright Incorporated 2009. All rights reserved. Disclaimer Incorporated shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein; nor for incidental or consequential

More information

Panaboard Overlayer User's Guide. Image Capture Software for Electronic Whiteboard (Panaboard)

Panaboard Overlayer User's Guide. Image Capture Software for Electronic Whiteboard (Panaboard) Panaboard Overlayer User's Guide Image Capture Software for Electronic Whiteboard (Panaboard) Contents Introduction... 3 Functional Overview... 3 Operation Flow... 3 Abbreviations... 4 Trademarks... 4

More information

Installation and Configuration Manual. Price List Utilities. for Microsoft Dynamics CRM Dynamics Professional Solutions Ltd 1 / 14

Installation and Configuration Manual. Price List Utilities. for Microsoft Dynamics CRM Dynamics Professional Solutions Ltd 1 / 14 Installation and Configuration Manual Price List Utilities for Microsoft Dynamics CRM 2011 Dynamics Professional Solutions Ltd 1 / 14 Copyright Warranty disclaimer Limitation of liability License agreement

More information

Report Viewer Version 8.1 Getting Started Guide

Report Viewer Version 8.1 Getting Started Guide Report Viewer Version 8.1 Getting Started Guide Entire Contents Copyright 1988-2017, CyberMetrics Corporation All Rights Reserved Worldwide. GTLRV8.1-11292017 U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS This software

More information

Installation & Operation Guide

Installation & Operation Guide Installation & Operation Guide This manual is the operation guide for Medal Editor. Please refer to this manual to install the software or create medal data used on the processing machine. Items That May

More information

Software User's Guide

Software User's Guide Software User's Guide The contents of this guide and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice. Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications

More information

Software User's Guide

Software User's Guide Software User's Guide Brother QL-series The contents of this guide and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice. Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice

More information

DRAFT. Table of Contents About this manual... ix About CuteSITE Builder... ix. Getting Started... 1

DRAFT. Table of Contents About this manual... ix About CuteSITE Builder... ix. Getting Started... 1 DRAFT Table of Contents About this manual... ix About CuteSITE Builder... ix Getting Started... 1 Setting up... 1 System Requirements... 1 To install CuteSITE Builder... 1 To register CuteSITE Builder...

More information

Embird Manual (part 2)

Embird Manual (part 2) Embird Manual (part 2) 2003 by Ladislav Balara, Embird 1st edition August 28, 2003 All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means

More information

Generic HART DTM for FDT 1.2 compliant Frame Applications Release 4

Generic HART DTM for FDT 1.2 compliant Frame Applications Release 4 Generic HART DTM for FDT 1.2 compliant Frame Applications Release 4 Copyright ICS Industrielle Computer Systeme GmbH 2007, all rights reserved. Sublicense for brand labeled version granted to Microflex,

More information

TheFinancialEdge. Crystal Reports Tutorial

TheFinancialEdge. Crystal Reports Tutorial TheFinancialEdge Crystal Reports Tutorial 101911 2011 Blackbaud, Inc. This publication, or any part thereof, may not be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, or mechanical,

More information

Price List Utilities. For Dynamics CRM 2016

Price List Utilities. For Dynamics CRM 2016 Price List Utilities For Dynamics CRM 2016 Page 1 of 19 Price List Utilities 2016 Copyright Warranty disclaimer Limitation of liability License agreement Copyright 2016 Dynamics Professional Solutions.

More information

DME-N Network Driver Installation Guide for M7CL

DME-N Network Driver Installation Guide for M7CL DME-N Network Driver Installation Guide for M7CL ATTENTION SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT ( AGREEMENT ) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE ONLY PERMITTED

More information

VisualPST 2.4. Visual object report editor for PowerSchool. Copyright Park Bench Software, LLC All Rights Reserved

VisualPST 2.4. Visual object report editor for PowerSchool. Copyright Park Bench Software, LLC All Rights Reserved VisualPST 2.4 Visual object report editor for PowerSchool Copyright 2004-2015 Park Bench Software, LLC All Rights Reserved www.parkbenchsoftware.com This software is not free - if you use it, you must

More information

USB Memory Drive CD with Application Software and Drivers for Windows 98SE. 32 MB, > 64 MB recommended. min. 2x (for probable installation)

USB Memory Drive CD with Application Software and Drivers for Windows 98SE. 32 MB, > 64 MB recommended. min. 2x (for probable installation) User Manual USB Memory Drive Content: Included with USB Memory Drive...1 System Requirements...1 Warranty...2 Making Copies of This Manual...2 Notes on this Manual...3 Data Security...3 Operational Safety...3

More information

User Guide 701P Wide Format Solution Wide Format Scan Service

User Guide 701P Wide Format Solution Wide Format Scan Service User Guide 701P44865 6204 Wide Format Solution Wide Format Scan Service Xerox Corporation Global Knowledge & Language Services 800 Phillips Road Bldg. 845-17S Webster, NY 14580 Copyright 2006 Xerox Corporation.

More information

Tajima DGML by Pulse Software Version 2009 Setting Up The Software

Tajima DGML by Pulse Software Version 2009 Setting Up The Software Tajima DGML by Pulse Software Version 2009 Setting Up The Software Before we start to learn anything about the software, I will show you how to set up your screen to work with ease. Before we actually

More information

Fire Scene 6. Tip Sheet

Fire Scene 6. Tip Sheet Fire Scene 6 Tip Sheet Fire Scene 6 All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping,

More information

What can Word 2013 do?

What can Word 2013 do? Mary Ann Wallner What can Word 2013 do? Provide the right tool for: Every aspect of document creation Desktop publishing Web publishing 2 Windows 7: Click Start Choose Microsoft Office > Microsoft Word

More information

Network-MIDI Driver Installation Guide

Network-MIDI Driver Installation Guide Network-MIDI Driver Installation Guide ATTENTION SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT ( AGREEMENT ) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE ONLY PERMITTED TO USE

More information

INTELLEX SOFTWARE VERSION 3.1 UPGRADE

INTELLEX SOFTWARE VERSION 3.1 UPGRADE INTELLEX SOFTWARE VERSION 3.1 UPGRADE This software upgrades an Intellex 3.0 unit to version 3.1 software. This release of the 3.1 software (v3.1.35) is configurable to English, French, German, and Spanish

More information

TWAIN 163/211. User Manual

TWAIN 163/211. User Manual TWAIN 163/211 User Manual Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Software end user license agreement... 1-5 1.2 Explanation of manual conventions... 1-8 Safety advices... 1-8 Sequence of action... 1-8 Tips... 1-9

More information

Pacesetter Simply Appliqué Instruction Manual

Pacesetter Simply Appliqué Instruction Manual Pacesetter Simply Appliqué ii Pacesetter Simply Appliqué Copyright Copyright 2015 Pulse Microsystems Ltd. All rights reserved. This instruction manual and software are copyrighted by the developer of the

More information

USER GUIDE OUTPUT DESIGNS

USER GUIDE OUTPUT DESIGNS USER GUIDE OUTPUT DESIGNS COPYRIGHT Copyright 2016. Wilcom Pty Ltd, Wilcom International Pty Ltd. All Rights reserved. No parts of this publication or the accompanying software may be copied or distributed,

More information

6D Embroidery Software - Pretty Paisleys

6D Embroidery Software - Pretty Paisleys 6D Embroidery Software - Pretty Paisleys By: Soni Grint Learn what type of picture is best to use for a background while digitizing these pretty paisleys. Adjust the picture as needed before placing stitches.

More information

Board Viewer INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Board Viewer INSTRUCTION MANUAL Board Viewer INSTRUCTION MANUAL CheckSum, Inc. P.O. Box 3279 Arlington, WA 98223 (360) 435-5510 Fax (360) 435-5535 Web Site: www.checksum.com P/N 4400-048 Revision 3/2003 Copyright 1990-2003, CheckSum,

More information

Roland CutChoice. Ver. 1.1 USER S MANUAL. Thank the user very much for purchasing the Roland cutter.

Roland CutChoice. Ver. 1.1 USER S MANUAL. Thank the user very much for purchasing the Roland cutter. Roland CutChoice Ver. 1.1 USER S MANUAL Thank the user very much for purchasing the Roland cutter. S To ensure correct and safe usage with a full understanding of this product s performance, please be

More information

DSM PRO. Installation Manual. Copyright November DSM PRO Installation Manual Rev 2 Effective 5/24/05 1

DSM PRO. Installation Manual. Copyright November DSM PRO Installation Manual Rev 2 Effective 5/24/05 1 DSM PRO Installation Manual Copyright November 2003 DSM PRO Installation Manual Rev 2 Effective 5/24/05 1 DSM PRO CONNECTIONS TALKOVER LEVEL TALKOVER LEVEL DISPLAY SPEAKER VOLUME HEADSET VOLUME USB CABLE

More information

Software Package Installation Instructions

Software Package Installation Instructions Introduction Novar provides an automatic installation package that involves reading simple, easy-to-follow instructions on each screen and clicking on the appropriate options. This document provides detailed

More information

DataMaster for Windows

DataMaster for Windows DataMaster for Windows Version 3.0 April 2004 Mid America Computer Corp. 111 Admiral Drive Blair, NE 68008-0700 (402) 426-6222 Copyright 2003-2004 Mid America Computer Corp. All rights reserved. Table

More information

T-Invoicer User Guide

T-Invoicer User Guide - 1 - T-Invoicer User Guide Introduction T-Invoicer is an entry level invoicing system designed for small & startup business's who need to invoice customers quickly & easily. T-Invoicer has all the basic

More information

Top. Videoconferencing Systems. vpoint HD. Version 7.0. Getting Started Guide. DOC00053 Rev

Top. Videoconferencing Systems. vpoint HD. Version 7.0. Getting Started Guide. DOC00053 Rev Top Videoconferencing Systems vpoint HD Version 7.0 Getting Started Guide DOC00053 Rev. 6.0 04.06 2006 Emblaze-VCON Ltd. All Rights Reserved. This material is proprietary of Emblaze-VCON, Ltd. No part

More information

Designer Reference 1

Designer Reference 1 Designer Reference 1 Table of Contents USE OF THE DESIGNER...4 KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS...5 Shortcuts...5 Keyboard Hints...5 MENUS...7 File Menu...7 Edit Menu...8 Favorites Menu...9 Document Menu...10 Item Menu...12

More information

FastTrack Schedule 10. Tutorials. Copyright 2010, AEC Software, Inc. All rights reserved.

FastTrack Schedule 10. Tutorials. Copyright 2010, AEC Software, Inc. All rights reserved. FastTrack Schedule 10 Tutorials FastTrack Schedule Tutorials Version 10.0.0 by Carol S. Williamson AEC Software, Inc. With FastTrack Schedule 10, the new version of the award-winning project manager,

More information

User Guide. Version 2.20

User Guide. Version 2.20 User Guide Version 2.20 All rights reserved. No part of this publication and the hardware or software described in it may be reproduced in whole or in part. This User Guide may contain samples of names

More information

MOTIF-RACK XS Editor Installation Guide

MOTIF-RACK XS Editor Installation Guide MOTIF-RACK XS Editor Installation Guide ATTENTION SOFTWARE LICENSING AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT ( AGREEMENT ) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE ONLY PERMITTED TO

More information

Chapter 16. Version 1.5 Features. Contents: Chapter 16

Chapter 16. Version 1.5 Features. Contents: Chapter 16 Chapter 16 Version 1.5 Features Contents: New Version 1.5 Screen Overview...p.16-2 View Preferences - New Hoop Settings...p.16-2 View Preferences - New Canvas Settings... p.16-11 Keyboard Shortcuts...p.16-13

More information

LABEL MATRIX TEKLYNX V E R S I O N 8 Q U I C K S T A R T G U I D E

LABEL MATRIX TEKLYNX V E R S I O N 8 Q U I C K S T A R T G U I D E TEKLYNX LABEL MATRIX V E R S I O N 8 Q U I C K S T A R T G U I D E Note Quick Start Guide The information in this manual is not binding and may be modified without prior notice. Supply of the software

More information

The BuzzBox User Manual Revised June 2006

The BuzzBox User Manual Revised June 2006 The BuzzBox User Manual Revised June 2006 FCC Regulations Compliance (for USA) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules.

More information

ALL-TEST PRO 33IND PC Software Quick Start Guide

ALL-TEST PRO 33IND PC Software Quick Start Guide ALL-TEST PRO 33IND PC Software Quick Start Guide 2011 ALL-TEST Pro, LLC All Rights Reserved Rev 2011-12A Contact Information...2 Installation... 3 Introduction... 5 Basic commands... 7 New... 7 Open...

More information

Release Notes and Installation Instructions for EDS IV Version 1.00

Release Notes and Installation Instructions for EDS IV Version 1.00 Release Notes and Installation Instructions for EDS IV Version 1.00 Part Number 14627 Rev. A Important! This document contains information about EDS IV Version 1.00 that may not be included in the manual.

More information

USER GUIDE MANAGE DESIGNS

USER GUIDE MANAGE DESIGNS USER GUIDE MANAGE DESIGNS CONTENTS Manage designs... 1 Configure design thumbnails... 2 Browse designs... 6 Open the embroidery library... 6 Change design display... 8 Filter, sort, and search for designs...

More information

RealPresence Media Manager

RealPresence Media Manager RealPresence CloudAXIS Suite Administrators Guide Software 1.3.1 USER GUIDE Software 6.7 January 2015 3725-75302-001A RealPresence Media Manager Polycom, Inc. 1 Copyright 2015, Polycom, Inc. All rights

More information

GPA Migration Guide

GPA Migration Guide Diablo BTU Calculator 2.0 GPA 2145-09 Migration Guide Copyright 2008, Diablo Analytical, Inc. Diablo Analytical BTU Calculator 2.0 Software GPA 2145-09 Migration Guide Copyright 2008, Diablo Analytical,

More information

EMULATOR SYSTEM MB

EMULATOR SYSTEM MB Fujitsu Microelectronics Europe Application Note MCU-AN-391026-E-V12 FR FAMILY SUPPORT TOOL EMULATOR SYSTEM MB2198-01 INSTALLATION GUIDE MB2198-01 APPLICATION NOTE Revision History Revision History Date

More information

Buzz-2-Stitches - Quick Guide

Buzz-2-Stitches - Quick Guide Quick Start Guide Copyright 2007 by Buzz Tools, Inc. All U.S. and international rights reserved. This manual and the software described in it, are furnished under license and may be used or copied only

More information

TOOLS for n Version2 Update Guide

TOOLS for n Version2 Update Guide TOOLS for n Version2 Update Guide SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT ( AGREEMENT ) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE

More information

Contents. Introduction... 4

Contents. Introduction... 4 Copyright 2008 Idea Spectrum, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Realtime Landscaping Plus, the Realtime Landscaping Plus logo, Idea Spectrum, and the Idea Spectrum logo are all trademarks of Idea Spectrum, Inc.

More information

Software Operations Manual. Copyright 2018

Software Operations Manual. Copyright 2018 Threads Embroidery Software Software Operations Manual Copyright 2018 TheEmbroideryWarehouse Threads Embroidery Software a 2018 TheEmbroideryWarehouse www.threadses.com All rights reserved. No part of

More information

Stellar WAB to PST Converter 1.0

Stellar WAB to PST Converter 1.0 Stellar WAB to PST Converter 1.0 1 Overview Stellar WAB to PST Converter software converts Outlook Express Address Book, also known as Windows Address Book (WAB) files to Microsoft Outlook (PST) files.

More information

Anatomy of a Window (Windows 7, Office 2010)

Anatomy of a Window (Windows 7, Office 2010) Anatomy of a Window (Windows 7, Office 2010) Each window is made up of bars, ribbons, and buttons. They can be confusing because many of them are not marked clearly and rely only on a small symbol to indicate

More information

FONT SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT. We recommend that you print this Font Software End User License Agreement for further reference.

FONT SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT. We recommend that you print this Font Software End User License Agreement for further reference. FONT SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT We recommend that you print this Font Software End User License Agreement for further reference. This Font Software End User License Agreement (the Agreement )

More information

Pacesetter BES Lettering 2 Instruction Manual

Pacesetter BES Lettering 2 Instruction Manual Pacesetter BES Lettering 2 ii Pacesetter BES Lettering 2 Copyright Copyright 2011 Pulse Microsystems Ltd. All rights reserved. This instruction manual and software are copyrighted by the developer of the

More information

Vivado Design Suite Tutorial. Designing IP Subsystems Using IP Integrator

Vivado Design Suite Tutorial. Designing IP Subsystems Using IP Integrator Vivado Design Suite Tutorial Designing IP Subsystems Using IP Integrator Notice of Disclaimer The information disclosed to you hereunder (the "Materials") is provided solely for the selection and use of

More information

FlukeView Forms. Users Manual. Documenting Software

FlukeView Forms. Users Manual. Documenting Software FlukeView Forms Documenting Software September 2000, Rev. 6, 2/09 2002, 2003, 2005, 2007, 2009 Fluke Corporation. All rights reserved. All product names are trademarks of their respective companies. Table

More information

EXCEL 2002 (XP) FOCUS ON: DESIGNING SPREADSHEETS AND WORKBOOKS

EXCEL 2002 (XP) FOCUS ON: DESIGNING SPREADSHEETS AND WORKBOOKS EXCEL 2002 (XP) FOCUS ON: DESIGNING SPREADSHEETS AND WORKBOOKS ABOUT GLOBAL KNOWLEDGE, INC. Global Knowledge, Inc., the world s largest independent provider of integrated IT education solutions, is dedicated

More information

Stellar Phoenix Password Recovery For Windows Server. Version 2.0. User Guide

Stellar Phoenix Password Recovery For Windows Server. Version 2.0. User Guide Stellar Phoenix Password Recovery For Windows Server Version 2.0 User Guide Overview Stellar Phoenix Password Recovery For Windows Server is a powerful application that helps you reset a Windows Server

More information